Opportunities

View All & Sort By:

Environmental/Geo/Agriculture (7)

  • Solar Power B2B with No Self-Performing Labor

    This business sells and coordinates installation for solar power to local industrial and commercial clients. They do not self-perform any of the labor, allowing them to maintain a profit margin over 20% year over year. The current team includes 6 core employees: 1 project manager, 1 project coordinator/client liaison, 2 business development associates, 1 sales manager, and 1 outside sales rep. Outside of this core team, they hire and coordinate subcontractors in the area for labor. Thanks to the size of this team and installation strategy, the overhead costs have been kept low by operating out of a modest 4,200 square foot office space and very minimal equipment CapEx. Their services include solar power equipment sales and coordinating installation, with the client base made up of 90% commercial and industrial clients and 10% agricultural, nonprofit organizations, and schools. They operate in Missouri, Iowa, Kansas, and Illinois. This company signs only 25% of their contracts in Q1; they currently have over $3M in signed contracts, which would have annualized revenue reaching $12M! The majority (50%) of their contracts are signed in Q4.

     

    Thanks to their skilled team, including a sales manager and sales reps, this business-to-business company has no trouble finding new clients. The recently passed US Infrastructure Bill will directly and positively impact this company. Additionally, the continued push for green energy will organically push this industry. The current owner is looking to phase out over a 1-3 year transition period and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 10% promissory note. We believe that this shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $7,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,670,114

  • Upstate New York Environmental Services

     

    This upstate New York company provides environmental services regionally and has generally low inventory, as everything needed is purchase based on the job at hand.  This company provides asbestos removal, lead remediation, and fireproofing services.  They are consistently seeing year over year growth and hit over $8M in revenue in 2021!  They have been established in upstate New York since 2012.

     

    Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant. 

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Priced at $898,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $147,250 in the first year after debt payments – a 131% return on investment! Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

    PRICE $898,000 CASH FLOW $262,089

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Environmental Services for Commercial Clientele

    Passive ownership with 37 skilled employees in Washington! Located in the Seattle, Washington area, these specialists in the environmental industry have earned a 25% profit margin in 2018 and continue to experience year-over-year growth.  Asbestos removal (40%), interior demolition (40%), as well as mold and lead remediation (20%) are the main services offered by this company.  Commercial clients account for 80% of annual contract revenues, with residential projects producing 20%.  Clients include The Federal Government, Washington State Universities and schools, local municipalities, and health care facilities.  Day-to-day operations are led by a tenured vice president with management oversight of two administrative assistants, three estimators with project management experience, three operations managers, seven supervisors and the workforce.  The owner currently leads in a consultant capacity mentoring and developing leadership staff while also ensuring bonding and insurance.

     

    With a total of 9,300 square feet of space, the headquarters has ample room to further expand operations.  The office is 2,800 square feet and features five private offices, a reception area, a large conference room used for meetings, training, and environmental records storage.   The warehouse and shop span 6,500 square feet of indoor space allowing for staging, tool and inventory storage, and warehouse management.  An expansive paved lot and gravel yard of two acres house all heavy equipment, vehicles, disposal containers, and trailers.  Assets comprise all equipment necessary for safe testing, handling, and removal of hazardous materials.

     

    Strong revenue generating initiatives could be achieved by increasing the workforce to take on contracts currently sacrificed, driving growth of the container rental business, and utilizing targeted advertising to generate new contacts.

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,112,023

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • Commercial Roofing in PA – 90 Employees

    With over $14.3M in sales in 2020, this commercial roofing company has 90 W2 employees in place! Established for over 20 years and with 100% commercial clients, their focus is on larger industrial and institutional projects; project size ranges from $75k to $3.75M. Offering reroofing (50% of their revenue) new construction (40%) and repair & maintenance (10%) within a 75-mile radius of Pittsburgh, this team of 90 employees is comprised of 75 craftsmen and sheet metal workers, along with 15 salaried support staff. The company subs out only as needed based on project size and ancillary services in the contract. Their clientele is a diverse assortment of consultants, general contractors, and private owners; this business is highly sought after in the greater Pittsburgh region.  Revenue reached over $14.3M in 2020, and 2021 is looking highly profitable, with over $16M already in their backlog. With over $9M in assets, the bank loan is over 70% collateralized.

     

    The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-to-month basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The  non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction.

     

    Priced at $12,250,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Pursuing more maintenance work and roofing-related sheet metal projects would certainly increase revenue. With already long-standing client relationships in place, organic growth is inevitable if services are expanded.

    PRICE $12,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,614,063

  • Engineering in OKC with 3 Licensed Professionals

    This structural engineering firm based in OKC has been able to maintain 90% repeat clients with 3 licensed engineers. This combined with their 2021 profit margin of 49% and the fact that 2022 has been seeing a higher revenue than 2021 and is annualized to show that they are on the track to even beating their 2020 revenue should explain why current ownership has such faith in the business’s continued potential. The team consists of 3 Engineers, 1 CAD technician; 5-6 drafters at contracted firm, and the owner who handles oversight and final approval of plans. Their clients are 100% commercial, with their work including institutional buildings, warehouses, retail shopping centers, schools, gymnasiums, churches, and retirement & nursing homes. With the qualifications that the staff holds, they can offer any service surrounding structural engineering. Seizing the opportunities of the potential growth within the company will not only increase capacity, but also expand the client base.

    Most of this company’s clients are in Oklahoma (95%), but those companies have multiple locations throughout the United States and due to their long-term relationships, the firm handles work for many of those projects. The company utilizes 2,600 square feet of space in a local office building.  There is room within the building for expansion, if desired.  

    Priced at $1,550,000 a 10% down payment of $155,000 returns $250,752 in the first year after debt payments, this a return-on-investment rate of 162%! The current owner has agreed to stay on for two years and carry 20% of the business after purchase to show just how much faith he has in the business and in the new owner’s opportunities to continue and grow.

    PRICE $1,550,000 CASH FLOW $491,205

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Toronto Multi-Service Engineering Firm – 31% Profit Margin

    With over $4.6M in sales and a 31% profit margin in 2020, this Toronto-based engineering consulting firm has seen steady growth over the years. With solid long-term relationships established with their clients throughout Canada, they offer a variety of services including geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, noise & vibration monitoring, geotechnical engineering & material testing, building design, environmental engineering, civil engineering design & planning, hydrogeological engineering, Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) scanning services, noise impact studying, and construction dust monitoring.  Taking on large, long-term projects for transit authorities, governmental organizations, and general contractors, this company has wide-ranging capabilities creating a consolidated resource for customers to meet their project goals. A focus of the company is on transit systems including tunneling, subway, rail and subway stations, bridges, sewer and water infrastructure, and highways. Their 50 personnel includes professional engineers, architects, subject matter experts, software engineers, surveyors, accounting, and administration.

    The owner of this business currently oversees operations and is a reliable and very knowledgeable resource for employees. The owner manages the strong growth trajectory and supports positive client relationships.  To continue revenue growth, one could consider offering commissions to the sales team to boost external relationships networking and earning additional contracts.  

    Operations are managed from the 10,000 square foot headquarters located in the Greater Toronto Area. The company has over 15 years of experience serving Canada, and has expanded its business to Trinidad, Tobago, Turkey, China, and the United States.

    PRICE $8,400,000 CASH FLOW $1,420,321

  • Wireless Tech Company with $9M Top Line Potential

    This business with a 29% profit margin has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $8,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Full-Service Architecture Firm Looking for Partner

    This Canadian Full-Service Architecture firm would be the perfect opportunity for someone that already owns an architecture firm and is wanting to grow their business. The current owner asks that the buyer already be the owner of an architecture firm as he is looking for a partner to further the business through effective and targeted marketing in the future. Currently, the majority of their business (80%) is focused on high rise condos, an area in which this company has seen immense profit and potential for more. Established in 2000 this firm has been able to build a strong client base over the past 20+ years. Current ownership is planning to stay on and handle the majority of the architecture side of business, but feels that he has reached his potential in growing the business side of the firm and is looking for new ownership to expand on the foundation that he has created. He would plan on staying on as either a minority partner or principal holder. With a highly educated and experienced team of 4 architects (including seller) and 3 architecture techs they are ready to take on commercial, residential, industrial, and interior projects. With this well established and dedicated team they are able to design the project from start to finish including everything from the foundation of the project to the interior of the completed building. The team has a well-established and excellent reputation in the Toronto area which has allowed them to increase their revenue to a projected 2022 revenue of over $1.8 million, which is nearly more than $800,000 higher than pre-pandemic levels!

     

    Growth opportunities for new ownership moving forward include expanding marketing tactics, expanding on current partnerships and excellent reputation, and expanding revenue focus to grow other types of projects which the business already has the capacity to handle. The office this firm is currently operating out of is a 2,500 sq. foot space.

     

    Priced at $1,200,000, this is an incredible opportunity for a new owner to step in and focus on recruiting and business development, while partnering with the current owner to expand. Most clients are obtained through word-of-mouth referrals and are often repeat clients, proving this firm’s commitment to listening and working collaboratively with their clients throughout the projects. This partnership will result in more work being sought after and more projects brought into the fold, giving great potential for increased revenue and business expansion.

    PRICE $1,200,000 CASH FLOW $546,386

  • Established International Commercial Architecture and Design Firm Based in New England

    With an affluent worldwide client base, the current owner of this profitable Boston based design and architecture firm is willing to stay on for 2-4 years to help ease transition and is offering 20% financing as a show of good faith in the business moving forward. This firm serves international clients, with areas of service including New England, the Middle East, the Caribbean, Midwest U.S., Texas, and more! Established in 1989, the firm’s work is recognizable from Times Square to Saudi Arabia, and they’ve built a high reputation world-wide. Focusing on interior architecture and mostly commercial clients, the firm has more than 220 hotels & restaurant projects under its belt. Though they mostly focus on condos and hospitality, they are also able to take on diverse projects, with examples ranging from fitness centers, health clubs, country clubs, cafes, entertainment venues, aquariums, planetariums, and even palaces! They have directed projects in excess of $5 billion and enjoy a history of awards and recognition as a leader in the industry. We based our valuation of this company on the 2019 (pre Covid) and 2022 projected (post Covid) numbers due to the fact that the 2020-2021 numbers are not in tune with continuing operations for the firm.

     

    The business is best known for their timeliness and their guarantee to always be on budget. This design firm is a very well known in the Boston area and most clients are acquired through word-of-mouth referrals from completed contracts. Along with a great reputation, they also have excellent personnel. Employees include 1 design director, 1 senior designer, 1 senior CAD designer, 1 designer, 1 purchasing agent, 1 junior designer, 1 renderer, and 1 bookkeeper. Creating additional marketing plans and increasing in-person sales are options to help continue to grow this business. The firm is currently under contract for a 10,000 square foot restaurant and six other restaurant venues.

     

    Priced at $1,100,000, this is a business opportunity with outstanding growth potential. The owner does not do any drawing or CAD work but oversees overall strategy and interfaces with key employees. The current plan is also to expand staff to include two more senior designers and an intern. 

    PRICE $1,100,000 CASH FLOW $302,274

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Environmental Services for Commercial Clientele

    Passive ownership with 37 skilled employees in Washington! Located in the Seattle, Washington area, these specialists in the environmental industry have earned a 25% profit margin in 2018 and continue to experience year-over-year growth.  Asbestos removal (40%), interior demolition (40%), as well as mold and lead remediation (20%) are the main services offered by this company.  Commercial clients account for 80% of annual contract revenues, with residential projects producing 20%.  Clients include The Federal Government, Washington State Universities and schools, local municipalities, and health care facilities.  Day-to-day operations are led by a tenured vice president with management oversight of two administrative assistants, three estimators with project management experience, three operations managers, seven supervisors and the workforce.  The owner currently leads in a consultant capacity mentoring and developing leadership staff while also ensuring bonding and insurance.

     

    With a total of 9,300 square feet of space, the headquarters has ample room to further expand operations.  The office is 2,800 square feet and features five private offices, a reception area, a large conference room used for meetings, training, and environmental records storage.   The warehouse and shop span 6,500 square feet of indoor space allowing for staging, tool and inventory storage, and warehouse management.  An expansive paved lot and gravel yard of two acres house all heavy equipment, vehicles, disposal containers, and trailers.  Assets comprise all equipment necessary for safe testing, handling, and removal of hazardous materials.

     

    Strong revenue generating initiatives could be achieved by increasing the workforce to take on contracts currently sacrificed, driving growth of the container rental business, and utilizing targeted advertising to generate new contacts.

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,112,023

  • Painting Contractor with 85% Reccurring Clients

    This New York based industrial painting company receives approximately 40 projects a year in municipal infrastructure! Boasting an experienced team of over 90 employees, including 3 project managers, 8 foremen, more than 75 painters and 6 administrative employees, 15 years of quality work has resulted in strong relationships with general contractors and a competitive bidding process that brings in $500K - $1M per project. Included in the purchase is a current backlog of $73M and $2.8M of assets, which includes safety equipment, rigging, and supplies, plus $680K in trucks and trailers. The company’s services include industrial painting and site preparation for jobs such as bridges, tunnels, and transit stations. The company also offers lead abatement and shield integration, services which keep workflow high during the winter months. Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings. Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to stay on for 20 hours a week during an 18 month transition period. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing.  The sellers are willing to roll equity for 12.5% of the purchase price, then do a seller carry for another 12.5% for a total of 25%, as a sign of good faith in the business.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,213,361

Manufacturing/Fabrication (13)

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Established Plumbing and Piping Company

    This plumbing and piping company has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers! Based in Michigan, this business is well established with an excellent local reputation. Services offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipe-fitting (25% of service area). This business comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 FT field technicians, 2 PT estimators, 1 PT bookkeeper, and 1 PT administrative worker. Current ownership works full time overseeing estimates and visiting job sites weekly. They have offered a transition period of up to 3 years to ensure a smooth transition and to provide all information and skills needed for new ownership to enjoy further growth. A main reason for the success this business is enjoying is their extreme focus on customer service, especially the quality and timeliness of jobs.

     

    Situated in a growing industry in a strong location, clear growth opportunities present new ownership a route to great rewards in the face of growing competition. Outside of receiving work from both open and closed bids, the current owner’s only effort put towards recruiting new clients is cold calls when they have time, and a marketing campaign can elevate this business to an even larger client base. With their high rate of return clients, this additional marketing or advertising campaign could result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A well-planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path to growth. The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, and 1,500 sq. ft. to the office. There is plenty of room to expand operations and bring in more laborers.

     

    Priced at $1,250,000, a 12.5% down payment of $156,250 returns $164,706 in the first year after debt payments! This established and profitable plumbing service business is ready for new ownership to enjoy currently established partnerships and continue to create new ones. 

    PRICE $1,250,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • South-East Michigan Piping Company

    This South-East Michigan Piping Company presents a huge opportunity for a strategic owner. With an excellent reputation and $1M in backlog for 2022, as well as huge growth opportunities in marketing and hiring, this business is extremely rewarding for the ambitious owner. The seller is looking to stay on for 2-3 years to help set the business up for great success in the face of growing competition.

     

    The company boasts a team known for quality, punctual work delivered with a personal touch. With 25% of their work in pipe-fitting and 75% in plumbing, including both reworking existing pluming and installing new, this company has earned their high reputation and enjoys a strong base of repeat clientele due to the quality and timeliness of their work.

     

    Situated in a growing industry in a strong location, clear growth opportunities present the strategic owner a route to great rewards in the face of growing competition. The current owner only does cold calls when they have time, and a marketing campaign can elevate this business to an even larger client base, which will then be subject to a high repeat client percentage. A well planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path to growth.

     

    The team works out of  5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, and 1,500 sq. ft. to the office. There is plenty of room to expand operations and bring in more laborers. Servicing clients throughout the South-East Michigan area, this business returns $150,124 in the first year after debt payments, with a 10% down payment of $130,000.

    PRICE $1,300,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Popular Men’s Clothing Manufacturer With 3 other Clothing Labels as Subsidiaries

     

    This well established and stylish men’s clothing label and apparel manufacturer serves the US, Canada, and much of Europe supplying men’s apparel to a variety of retail stores. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person, meaning that this would be the perfect opportunity for someone looking for a company that would run itself with little oversight from that owner. The parent company has 3 subsidiaries also producing men’s apparel, to ensure the highest quality for each of the four labels, the company practices offshoring their manufacturing to 3 different factories located in, India, China, and Pakistan each of which can ship products directly to customers. Though each of these labels is solely focused on men’s clothing, there is ample opportunity for growth moving into the women’s and children’s clothing sectors. The current owner is willing to stay on for 6 months to a year to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Specializing in creating t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, the company has a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They own 3 other clothing brands under their leading brand, equally 4 altogether; to appeal to all markets. This company also collaborates with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for the company. There are currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and staying ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,200,000, and a 12.5% down payment of $275,000, a buyer can expect a return of $431,489 in the first year after debt payments! This is not an opportunity to miss out on! This business continues to preserve essential clients as well as providing excellent products! The company is ready for a new owner to take over the legacy!

     

    PRICE $2,200,000 CASH FLOW $712,832

  • Premier Full-Service Omaha Dental Laboratory

    Located in Omaha, Nebraska and with 7 FT employees in place, this premier full service dental laboratory is able to handle nearly every aspect of the job. This well-established business has been in operation since 1999 and enjoys a high reputation with clients. Experiencing constant revenue growth while simultaneously enjoying a 20% profit margin, this business is a stable investment into the dental industry, an essential economic need. Over $250k in assets are included in the sale, including 3D printers, scanners, steamers, and mixers. The lab operates out of two side by side offices and offers full service creating top-quality custom restorations for dental and oral surgery offices. With years of expertise in the industry, the business provides a seamless approach from design through completion.

     

    They offer many services such as implant restorations, veneers, 3D printing, crowns, bridges, and many more. This is a full-service lab that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well. 

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, the majority of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done.  The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources to do so now. There are seven total employees staffed at this laboratory, including six technicians specializing in different areas of dental artistry and one driver who delivers dental restorations to offices in a time-sensitive matter.

     

    At a purchase price of $830,000, a buyer can expect a $111,140 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team results in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $830,000 CASH FLOW $269,019

  • Glazing Contractor with 35k sq. ft. Factory & $7.5M in Backlog

    There is amazing growth potential for a new owner of this OKC Glazing Contractor; expanding services into Texas, Arkansas, Kansas, and Missouri would give a huge revenue boost! With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this company has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the business has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,020,000, the factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place for this business. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $252,500 returns $281,137 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,020,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • $1.5M in Assets at Design, Engineering, and Manufacturing Company

     

    There are over $1.5M in assets at this design, engineering, and manufacturing company! They are well established in the Chicago area but have loyal customers nationwide.  With $1.5M in sales and a 36% profit margin, the company specializes in the design, engineering, and manufacturing of hot runner systems and components for mold making and thermoplastic processing plants. After designing and engineering the custom hot runner system to fit their customers’ plastic injection molding system, they manufacture the system on-site, assuring quality control and reduced cost to their clients. They also have the capability to retrofit existing molds; they can repair or re-configure a system, replace heaters, nozzles, and other components, and they can troubleshoot leaks, heating issues, and flow problems. All of these services contribute to their long-standing client relationships and solid reputation in the market for over 35 years. Their diverse client base consists of mold makers and processing plants for consumer goods in categories such as medical, automotive, cosmetics, caps & closures, consumer electronics, and pet products. Their customers design the product, manufacture it through 3D printing, and gives them the specs; this team then designs the custom hot runner system needed to fit their needs and requirements.

     

    The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner (President/Treasurer), as well as a Design Engineer/Project Manager, 3 Machine Operators, 1 in Assembly, 1 Office Manager, and 1 Financial Officer. The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and team as well as some of the engineering; the Design Engineer/Project Manager handles all design engineering for the hot runner systems and manages each project from beginning to end.

     

    Priced at $2,050,000, this company certainly has the potential to go global!  An existing hot runner system company could take this business to the next level by using the 25 patented products, the team’s experience, and the customers already in place and expanding. A mold maker could also expand their business by purchasing this company, which would complement their services and products.


    PRICE $2,050,000 CASH FLOW $547,161

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Trailer Manufacturing, Painting, & Maintenance

     

    The bank loan would be 100% collateralized from the included business assets with the purchase of this trailer manufacturing, painting & maintenance company. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. The average sale size is $52,500 per trailer; trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Priced at $435,000, opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request.

    PRICE $435,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • HVAC, Sheet Metal Fabrication & Plumbing – Commercial Only

     

    60% collateralized and favorable financing terms! This HVAC and Plumbing company has been serving the Markham, Ontario area for over 15 years! They offer HVAC (50%), plumbing (45%), and refrigeration (5%) services to commercial and industrial customers within a 100-km radius of Markham. Their highly experienced hands-on team is comprised of 6 sheet metal fabricators, 4 plumbers, 5 on the refrigeration/gas crew, 1 administrative assistant, and 1 subcontracted PT bookkeeper.  Assets include 9 vehicles, each equipped with various tools and equipment for the task at hand, and the business has a substantial supply of machinery and equipment, including 7 vacuum pumps, 2 coring machines, 8 torches, various drills & die heads, 3 chop saws, 3 air compressors, a generator, and a backflow prevention kit.

     

    With this business having a services and construction side, they offer an extensive variety of services and projects! This business prides itself on being knowledgeable and well-trained to provide the highest level of technical service on systems such as air conditioning, refrigeration systems, process heating, ventilation systems, water chillers, boilers, and indoor air quality monitoring.

     

    With a solid reputation in place, this business gains clients through an ample number of word-of-mouth referrals. Increasing advertising efforts and creating a social media presence would lead to revenue growth. Hiring staff for management positions (Operations Manager, Service Manager, Chief Estimator, Project Manager) would undoubtedly take the company to the next level.

    PRICE $2,600,000 CASH FLOW $701,779

  • Wireless Tech Company with $9M Top Line Potential

    This business with a 29% profit margin has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $8,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

Contracting/Building/Improvements (12)

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Established Plumbing and Piping Company

    This plumbing and piping company has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers! Based in Michigan, this business is well established with an excellent local reputation. Services offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipe-fitting (25% of service area). This business comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 FT field technicians, 2 PT estimators, 1 PT bookkeeper, and 1 PT administrative worker. Current ownership works full time overseeing estimates and visiting job sites weekly. They have offered a transition period of up to 3 years to ensure a smooth transition and to provide all information and skills needed for new ownership to enjoy further growth. A main reason for the success this business is enjoying is their extreme focus on customer service, especially the quality and timeliness of jobs.

     

    Situated in a growing industry in a strong location, clear growth opportunities present new ownership a route to great rewards in the face of growing competition. Outside of receiving work from both open and closed bids, the current owner’s only effort put towards recruiting new clients is cold calls when they have time, and a marketing campaign can elevate this business to an even larger client base. With their high rate of return clients, this additional marketing or advertising campaign could result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A well-planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path to growth. The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, and 1,500 sq. ft. to the office. There is plenty of room to expand operations and bring in more laborers.

     

    Priced at $1,250,000, a 12.5% down payment of $156,250 returns $164,706 in the first year after debt payments! This established and profitable plumbing service business is ready for new ownership to enjoy currently established partnerships and continue to create new ones. 

    PRICE $1,250,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Solar Power B2B with No Self-Performing Labor

    This business sells and coordinates installation for solar power to local industrial and commercial clients. They do not self-perform any of the labor, allowing them to maintain a profit margin over 20% year over year. The current team includes 6 core employees: 1 project manager, 1 project coordinator/client liaison, 2 business development associates, 1 sales manager, and 1 outside sales rep. Outside of this core team, they hire and coordinate subcontractors in the area for labor. Thanks to the size of this team and installation strategy, the overhead costs have been kept low by operating out of a modest 4,200 square foot office space and very minimal equipment CapEx. Their services include solar power equipment sales and coordinating installation, with the client base made up of 90% commercial and industrial clients and 10% agricultural, nonprofit organizations, and schools. They operate in Missouri, Iowa, Kansas, and Illinois. This company signs only 25% of their contracts in Q1; they currently have over $3M in signed contracts, which would have annualized revenue reaching $12M! The majority (50%) of their contracts are signed in Q4.

     

    Thanks to their skilled team, including a sales manager and sales reps, this business-to-business company has no trouble finding new clients. The recently passed US Infrastructure Bill will directly and positively impact this company. Additionally, the continued push for green energy will organically push this industry. The current owner is looking to phase out over a 1-3 year transition period and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 10% promissory note. We believe that this shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $7,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,670,114

  • Louisiana Asbestos Inspections & Environmental Services

    This asbestos and environmental services company has maintained a 21% profit margin year over year, and included in the sale is over $200k in assets, including several trucks, trailers, an XRF analyzer, and other equipment. They complete work in three states – Louisiana, Arkansas, and Mississippi! With a diverse services list, a wide variety of clients are brought on to benefit from the work of the specialist staff. Services include asbestos abatement (30%), asbestos air monitoring (20%), asbestos inspection (20%), water sampling (20%), mold sampling (5%), and lead inspections (5%).  They do have the ability to train & license for asbestos workers at their facility as well, though this has not been heavily pursued as a growth opportunity. With the abundance of services offered, their services extend to municipalities, commercial contracts, banks, residential, and school boards.

     

    At their current location, a new owner would be taking over an office, 7 total storage facilities, equipment shed, and covered parking area (all at the same location).  The seller does own the real estate and is willing to rent it back to the next owner for $2,500/month.  This amount has been accounted for and adjusted in the provided cash flow. 

     

    While the seller does assist with bidding, the employees on staff are trained to do so as well.  The seller was in and out in 2020 due to a cancer diagnosis (now in remission), and the business still saw growth from 2019-2020 in both revenue and profit. 

     

    At a price of $570,000, and a down payment of $85,500, a buyer would expect to see a return of $84,808 in the first year after debt payments!

    PRICE $570,000 CASH FLOW $148,301

  • Rental Business with 36% Profit Margin

     

    This rental company boasts a profit margin of 36% and nearly $15M in assets! Services include hauling, installation, dismantlement, rental, and sale of frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms. On average, 60% of revenue comes from rentals. They are highly diversified, with 15 customers making up 70% of their revenue and 95% of their clients recurring, with 95% continually recurring; including general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair & installation contractors, there is no shortage of projects! The company is currently operating at a 36% profit margin, which is very strong. They are able to offer a wide range of services thanks to the 60+ skilled employees on staff, including 7 office staff, 3 mechanics, 3 field managers, 4 drivers, and 25-40 laborers.

     

    Boasting $4M in hydro mobile inventory (95+ units), they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 3-5 units. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market. In addition, the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill directly caters to this company’s core customer base and will certainly increase their revenue in the coming years.  The current workload consists of 45% restoration and 55% new construction. This company does little to no marketing or advertising due to their recurring clients or person.  A new owner could absolutely grow by simply adding a marketing and sales plan.

     

    Priced at $18,750,000, this business is 80% collateralized with the assets included in the sale!  It is positioned to grow in the contracting space by accepting more invitations, moving into neighboring cities, and expanding types of fleet, such as forklifts & drilling bores.  

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $5,304,421

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Full-Service Stone & Tile Restoration in Phoenix – 1,600+ Clients

    This stone & tile restoration company has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $620,000, a 10% down payment of $62,000 returns $106,494 in the first year after debt payments – a 172% return on investment!

    PRICE $620,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • Painting Contractor with 85% Reccurring Clients

    This New York based industrial painting company receives approximately 40 projects a year in municipal infrastructure! Boasting an experienced team of over 90 employees, including 3 project managers, 8 foremen, more than 75 painters and 6 administrative employees, 15 years of quality work has resulted in strong relationships with general contractors and a competitive bidding process that brings in $500K - $1M per project. Included in the purchase is a current backlog of $73M and $2.8M of assets, which includes safety equipment, rigging, and supplies, plus $680K in trucks and trailers. The company’s services include industrial painting and site preparation for jobs such as bridges, tunnels, and transit stations. The company also offers lead abatement and shield integration, services which keep workflow high during the winter months. Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings. Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to stay on for 20 hours a week during an 18 month transition period. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing.  The sellers are willing to roll equity for 12.5% of the purchase price, then do a seller carry for another 12.5% for a total of 25%, as a sign of good faith in the business.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,213,361

  • Home Remodels, Additions & Interior Design for Houston Real Estate Investors

    The owner of this company works part-time and does no field work!  With an infrastructure set up to support larger clients and maintain relationships, a highly skilled staff of 12 is already in place and continues to build solid client relationships. Employees include 1 PT Admin Assistant, 1 PT Office Manager, 1 PT Network IT, an Operations Manager, 1 Residential Estimator, 2 Superintendents, 1 Commercial Specialist, 2 Client Support staff, 1 Document Control staff, 1 Inside Salesperson and 6-12 field crew employees. Clients include corporate real estate investors, private entities, and some residential work, along with commercial and military when needed.  The team works all over Texas, with 70% of their work being done in Houston, 20% in San Antonio, and 10% in Dallas. Services vary from complete home remodels and home additions, to maintenance, repair, and interior design. The owner’s position has been designed to be strictly part-time operations and financial work. 

     

    Assets include $261k worth of equipment, $124k in vehicles, $180k in A/R, and $210k in work-in-progress.  The 4,200 sq. ft. warehouse, ½ acre equipment yard, and 2,500 sq. ft. office building currently used is available for sale or lease, separate from the sale of the business. 

     

    Priced at $990,000, a down payment of $123,750 returns $214,318 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment! The current owner is willing to stay on for 6 months to 1 year, if desired. Growth opportunities include expanding into business to consumer residential projects as well as taking on more governmental commercial contracts.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $340,922

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • K-12 Architecture Firm with Nationwide Clients: 25+ Expert Employees

    This firm specializes in the planning and for nationwide clients, specifically in the K-12, university, multi-family housing and hospitals. This extremely skilled staff of 28 full-time employees split between their two offices, consists of several architects, interior designers, and administrators. The team has a reputation of excellent customer service that has been established since this firm’s opening 16 years ago. Thanks to their locations in Oklahoma City, OK and Dallas, TX this firm is set to do exceptionally well in 2022 with their current financial information annualizing to show over $6.1M in revenue for 2022. In addition to the reputation, staff, and broad client base, this business also comes with $3,800,000 of backlog to allow new ownership to continue business operations and growth. As a demonstration of faith in the business, 10% seller financing and 15% equity roll is being offered. The current ownership is looking to retire, and they have offered a training/transition period of 2-3 years to ensure a smooth change of ownership.

     

    The owner primarily handles overall management, he has no reason to believe that a change of ownership would lead to a loss of clients or employees. This is especially true with the previously mentioned lengthy transition period offered. His salary has been accounted for in our cash flow analysis and the above listed cash flow. In addition to the excellent growth, the business comes with over $1.1M worth of assets. Not only do these assets afford new ownership the opportunity to ride the current growth pattern, they also offer an additional route of growth with no additional staff or purchases needed. New ownership could easily add hospital architecture to their niche portfolio for new growth.

     

    This business has been priced at $4,350,000 due to the recent cash flow, long-standing client base, 16 years of service and reputation, multiple locations, wide geographic range of client base, over $1.1M in assets included, 28 skilled employees, and the outstanding offered training period from new ownership. All of these amenities included leads new ownership to the ability to continue business as is and grow with expanded services at no foreseen additional costs.

    PRICE $4,350,000 CASH FLOW $1,201,592

  • Popular Men’s Clothing Manufacturer With 3 other Clothing Labels as Subsidiaries

     

    This well established and stylish men’s clothing label and apparel manufacturer serves the US, Canada, and much of Europe supplying men’s apparel to a variety of retail stores. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person, meaning that this would be the perfect opportunity for someone looking for a company that would run itself with little oversight from that owner. The parent company has 3 subsidiaries also producing men’s apparel, to ensure the highest quality for each of the four labels, the company practices offshoring their manufacturing to 3 different factories located in, India, China, and Pakistan each of which can ship products directly to customers. Though each of these labels is solely focused on men’s clothing, there is ample opportunity for growth moving into the women’s and children’s clothing sectors. The current owner is willing to stay on for 6 months to a year to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Specializing in creating t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, the company has a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They own 3 other clothing brands under their leading brand, equally 4 altogether; to appeal to all markets. This company also collaborates with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for the company. There are currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and staying ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,200,000, and a 12.5% down payment of $275,000, a buyer can expect a return of $431,489 in the first year after debt payments! This is not an opportunity to miss out on! This business continues to preserve essential clients as well as providing excellent products! The company is ready for a new owner to take over the legacy!

     

    PRICE $2,200,000 CASH FLOW $712,832

  • Branding and Marketing Firm with 26% Profit Margin

    This multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm has a fully trained core staff and the ability to adapt to any market ebb and flow thanks to consultants and freelance workers being contracted as needed. The core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies. With a 29% profit margin, it’s fair to say that their work experience and dedication to the field is paying off. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless.

     

    Primarily working with financial/retirement services, insurance, technology and healthcare categories, this agency is involved in industries that are playing an important role right now and using this opportunity to catch up in the digital space. The core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $11,500,000, this company is prime for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $11,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Passive Commercial Surveillance Company

     

    This opportunity is perfect for someone looking for a passive business. The current owner of this well-established commercial surveillance company lives out of the country for 4-6 months each year and the new owner can expect to do the same after the training period. This company installs popular surveillance systems for businesses in the Northern California area. A new owner will benefit from multiple growth opportunities: this business has great potential to expand into the residential sector if desired or operate as-is and enjoy an excellent return on the low down payment of $27,500!

     

    They are increasing installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expanding to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.) and adding government and municipal contracts would be perfect opportunities for revenue growth.

     

    • They are well-known in Northern California
    • 80% of sales is in the San Francisco Bay area, 15% regionally, and 5% of their business is nationwide.
    • Highly experienced team with everyone on the team having a 4+ year tenure
    • Uses advanced tech like secure wireless camera networks, license plate capturing cameras and Point of Sale surveillance systems

    The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and lives out of the country 4 months out of the year. The team is standardizing their service contracts to include both remote support and hands-on support, with an obvious preference for services they can provide remotely. Their camera systems offer real-time surveillance and video monitoring to ensure real-time protection.

     

    PRICE $275,000 CASH FLOW $76,776

  • Cable Installation for Data, Phone, and Electric

    This cable installation company works with 100% commercial clients and boasts an average 47% profit margin!  The current owners benefit from a low-overhead at their current 1,200 sq. ft. warehouse. With this purchase, a buyer would also be receiving $317K in assets, including $235K in vehicles, $12K in equipment, and $70K in A/R.  This well-established high/low voltage cable installation company already has $950,000 in project backlogs for 2022! Their experienced crew provides excellent service, working with large,  nationally-known retail clients. With their well trained staff, this company extends their services to 50 solid clients which includes local commercial construction firms, and subcontracting work for a national low voltage company.

    This company has licenses to work in both Florida and Georgia, with their main service area spanning 2 hours from their home base in Tampa Bay, Florida. Services provided include high/low voltage cable installation, pre-construction design, generator installation, and troubleshooting for electrical, structured cabling, building controls and security, and life safety systems. 

    The two owners are married, with one acting as president of the company (and handling the A/P and A/R work, permits, and other office tasks) while the other owner acts as the vice president, handling the purchasing of materials for projects, and doing the estimating for forthcoming projects. There are currently 6FT field technicians for installation work, with 2 PT office employees. The amount of field technicians employed varies depending on the project load. The current process for obtaining contracts takes about 1-2 months, with the average cost per project being $10,000.

    Priced at $1,600,000, after debt payment the buyer would see a return of $433,161 in the first year after debt payments! This contractor provides a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that can not only continue its significant work in the commercial sector but also expand greatly into the residential market. 

    PRICE $1,600,000 CASH FLOW $670,808

  • Health & Wellness Company Serving Employees

     

    This health and wellness company serves employers across various industries, and boasts strong client loyalty – with a 100% renewal rate in 2020! The company provides health and wellness programs which includes numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company also has extremely low overhead due to not requiring a commercial office space. The intangible asset of its long-term relationships with clients can’t be understated, providing a stable base for future growth.
     
    The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.
     
    Most clients have a one-year contract, and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.
     
    Priced at $490,000, a 10% down payment of $49,000 returns $118,046 in the first year after debt payments – a 241% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!
     

     

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $192,443

  • Dropship Supplier with Established Client Base

    With a well-established client base, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States! This business has over 75 repeat clients and relationships with over 20 vendors, this dropship company sold over $5M in 2021 and are on track to grow! In addition, they are in the goal to exceed $10M in sales this year with a 12% year over year growth in the slow season. They sell a wide variety of products, including office, janitorial, restaurant, and industrial supplies, as well as furniture and technology accessories. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and have an extremely efficient team of 5 contracted employees. They are currently fulfilling around 4,000 orders each month, with an increase in Q4 each year to accommodate holiday sales. If you’re looking to jump into the e-commerce space, you won’t want to miss this opportunity!

     

    They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.  75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.

     

    This company priced at $3,250,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,250,000 CASH FLOW $837,785

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Data Capture & Thermal Label Equipment Sales & Services – $3M+ in Revenue

    With a 96% recurring client base primarily in manufacturing, warehousing, distribution, and logistics, this Georgia-based company had nearly $4M in sales in 2020! This value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Helping their clients succeed for 15 years, this company provides custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few. This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,840,000 CASH FLOW $589,682

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • International PR and Event Firm with Passive Ownership

    This international company has been around since 1995, and in that time has been able to establish a diversified clientele base made up of only 30% local and regional clients and 70% international clients! This has been possible thanks to their 64 experienced staff members including 5 management board members and 33FT and 26PT workers operating in graphic design, client relations, media analysis, web services, social media, administration, editing, and outreach. With this excellent chain of command, the owner has been able to transition to a completely passive ownership with no billable hours. This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency currently has a profit margin of 29%. The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management. 

     

    The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well. Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of 64. This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease. 

     

    At a purchase price of $1,500,000 and a down payment of $300,000, a buyer would see a return of $308,766 in the first year after debt payments! This business is established and ready for a new owner to step in!

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Selfcare/Childcare (8)

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Health & Wellness Company Serving Employees

     

    This health and wellness company serves employers across various industries, and boasts strong client loyalty – with a 100% renewal rate in 2020! The company provides health and wellness programs which includes numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company also has extremely low overhead due to not requiring a commercial office space. The intangible asset of its long-term relationships with clients can’t be understated, providing a stable base for future growth.
     
    The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.
     
    Most clients have a one-year contract, and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.
     
    Priced at $490,000, a 10% down payment of $49,000 returns $118,046 in the first year after debt payments – a 241% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!
     

     

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $192,443

  • Endodontics Office with 2.5 DDS

    This endodontics office has been in business for more than 50 years! With 2.5 DDS working out of 4 operatories, they are bale to serve the entire Philadelphia area, this practice has a full staff on board who do both pre and post-procedure root canal work.  This business boasts a large and growing revenue stream and has the track record to demonstrate stability as well! The 4 operatories serve clients of all ages in Philadelphia and a 20-mile radius and have the ability to expand into the suburbs as well. This practice does both surgical and non-surgical procedures. Many of these procedures utilize newly developed technologies, while a unique procedure that was co-developed by an associate sees patients coming in from Europe to see them! The patient demographic range is significant, and the practice serves all ages. In striving for the best in quality patient care, this practice has set itself up as the biggest in the area.

     

    Under its current ownership since 2015, this practice has a 2,945 sq. ft. office space. Assets included in the space are 4 operatories along with microscopes and CPCT 3-D imaging machines. The current owner has a desire to step away from the business aspects of the practice in order to exclusively focus on their passion of patient care. They welcome all prospective buyers regardless of background and would stay on as long as needed to ensure that a smooth transition takes place.

     

    Priced at $905,000, this practice has a great deal of growth opportunities, including an expansion of operations out into the Philadelphia suburbs as well as an increase of online presence and general marketing! Just a 10% down payment of $90,500 returns $112,420 in the first year after debt payments—a 124% return on investment!

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $229,121

  • Home Health Franchise in Nebraska

    This home health care agency services 5 counties around the Omaha and surrounding counties in a field that will never be deemed unnecessary, healthcare. This home health company based in Nebraska had a 46% profit margin in 2021 and has 43 caregivers on staff!

     

    This company is a franchise that has been operating for 30 years, but this specific location has been under its current ownership since 2018.  This business has gained a great reputation due to the company’s excellent service!

     

    The current owner has offered 3-6 months of training and their responsibilities include general oversight and hiring new staff. The company itself offers the stability of a franchise office and this location is the most successful one.  Services offered by the 43 caregivers on staff include 24-hour care, care coordination, and long as well as short-term care.

     

    The agency serves 5 total counties surrounding the Omaha Metropolitan area. These counties include Douglas, Sarpy, Cass, and Saunders. As well as Pottawatomi County in Iowa.

     

    Growth opportunities include developing an established marketing plan, partnering with insurance companies to expand services, hiring a sales representative to further expand the client flow, and advancing current marketing tactics. 

     

    This agency goes the extra mile to ensure that their clients are receiving the best services in the comfort of their own home. They personally pair caregivers with clients based on personality and skillset and this attention to detail has afforded them an excellent reputation for care.

     

    Priced at $790,000, a 10% down payment of $79,000 returns $111,600 on the first year! This reputable company continues to grow due to their willingness to go the extra mile for their clients and consistent referrals.

     

     

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $228,938

  • Premier Full-Service Omaha Dental Laboratory

    Located in Omaha, Nebraska and with 7 FT employees in place, this premier full service dental laboratory is able to handle nearly every aspect of the job. This well-established business has been in operation since 1999 and enjoys a high reputation with clients. Experiencing constant revenue growth while simultaneously enjoying a 20% profit margin, this business is a stable investment into the dental industry, an essential economic need. Over $250k in assets are included in the sale, including 3D printers, scanners, steamers, and mixers. The lab operates out of two side by side offices and offers full service creating top-quality custom restorations for dental and oral surgery offices. With years of expertise in the industry, the business provides a seamless approach from design through completion.

     

    They offer many services such as implant restorations, veneers, 3D printing, crowns, bridges, and many more. This is a full-service lab that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well. 

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, the majority of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done.  The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources to do so now. There are seven total employees staffed at this laboratory, including six technicians specializing in different areas of dental artistry and one driver who delivers dental restorations to offices in a time-sensitive matter.

     

    At a purchase price of $830,000, a buyer can expect a $111,140 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team results in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $830,000 CASH FLOW $269,019

  • Profitable Iowa Day Spa with well-established client base

     

    This Central Iowa based day spa offers a wide range of services such as massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, men’s treatments, waxing, lash application and more. This is a great opportunity for someone looking to either get into the day spa business, or those interested in owing a profitable and self-sufficient business in Iowa. With 25 staff members, including a manager, assistant manager and 2 team leads, this creates the perfect opportunity to continue with passive ownership. This day spa boasts over 800 active memberships spanning their 3 types of memberships, though services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. As with most spas and similar operations they were mandated to close their doors for 2 months in 2020, yet still saw an increase in revenues and profit that year. Following reopening there has been an increase in cash flows between 2020 and 2021 totaling over $100,000. With over $1.4 million in revenue in 2021 this business is on a path to even higher growth with the right ownership and planning!

     

     

    This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the 2022 year.  Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. Based on the revenue for 2021 that would add up a total of $1,498,503 in revenue and based on the current profit margin of 18% that bumps the cash flow up to $269,730 only including current expected price changes, not including any new customers in the coming years. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and doing their best to provide a real resort feel just right around the corner.

     

    The attractive price of $790,000 allows a buyer to see a return of $140,767 in the first year after debt payments!  This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $256,295

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Nurse Staffing Agency in Texas with 32% Profit Margin

    Due to the supply and demand of nurses, this staffing agency has a steady flow of clients each week and has seen year-over-year growth in sales and consistently high profit margins! Established in West Central Texas for over 20 years, the company provides Registered Nurses, Licensed Vocational Nurses, Certified Nursing Assistants, and Certified Medication Aids for hospitals, clinics, nursing homes, government, state, and schools on an as-needed, short-term, or long-term basis. Partnering with some of the leading healthcare facilities in the state of Texas, each nurse recruited by the agency is sent to the client as a W2 employee, which sets them apart from other staffing agencies. They average 65-75 active employees (RN’s, LVN’s, CNA’s, and CMA’s) who are in the system and ready to work when needed. As facilities are constantly faced with last minute and temporary staffing needs due to vacations, staffing shortages, and open shifts as a result of scheduled and unscheduled absences, this agency has a steady flow of clients each week.

     

    Office staff includes 1 Office Manager/HR and 1 Staff Coordinator, and all nurses in their database are employed by the agency. All applicants are thoroughly screened before being submitted to a facility’s HR department. Base hourly rates for the nurses range from $18-$25/hour for CNA’s, $30-$37/hour for LVN’s, and $40-$47/hour for RN’s, with rates going higher if the nurse is working in a specialty unit or Covid unit. The number of clients/positions filled varies by the week, depending on demand; in general, the agency distributes 35-45 paychecks each week to the nurses.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this agency already has a solid reputation and a well-established client base. A new owner could easily boost revenue by implementing a marketing strategy, creating a social media presence, and updating the company website. This would be a great opportunity and highly beneficial for an existing staffing agency to purchase.

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,911,740

Vets/Pet Care/Animal Product (2)

  • Pet Daycare with Boarding & Training

    This dog daycare & boarding business recently moved into a new, larger facility in Kearney, Nebraska. They have an extremely diverse client base including individual pet owners, veterinarians, hunters, and both corporate and independent pet stores. Selling at a low multiple with a 72% profit margin in 2021, this business is a great opportunity for pet lovers and entrepreneurs alike to expand their professional horizons. The current owner spends about 10 hours a week on the business; mostly out of preference and has offered a 6 month training period to ensure a smooth transition. Proven methods and customer service set this dog care business apart from the competition. The business trains service dogs over long-term periods as well as offering shorter training periods for dogs and daily daycare services. The 5 person staff is extremely competent, with each staff member able to both train and care for dogs.

     

    This business is poised to grow with a 40 x 70 indoor facility which allows plenty of space for training and the 24 included large kennels. With growth shown during Covid and this business is on a continued upward trajectory, despite doing almost no marketing and relying mostly on their excellent reputation and word of mouth referrals. Continued expansion of services, particularly online services, could take this business to the next level. The current owner recommends maintaining their current focus of excellent customer service and transparency. A 10% down payment of $59,000 returns $165,529 in the first year after debt payments, a 247% return on investment!

    PRICE $590,000 CASH FLOW $253,161

  • Dog Daycare with Passive Ownership

    With 2 locations in the Charleston, South Carolina area this dog daycare is committed to providing the highest level of care and a personalized approach. The highly trained staff of 35 employees, including a general manager at each location to handle day to day operations allows clients to get the services and attention needed. They also allow for passive ownership as the current owner only handles general oversite. Their services include enrichment daycare, boarding, grooming & bathing, online dog training, in-home pet sitting, dog walking, wedding nanny, and pet taxis. Their years of expertise and variety of available services in the pet industry have allowed them to boast a 25% profit margin.

     

    The business’s main routes for finding new customers include social media ads, search engine optimization, and hosting events and sharing their monthly newsletter with emails collected during those events. Their excellent reputation and personalized approach have allowed for a significant repeat client base. The highly experienced team is passionate about what they do, giving the client base a feeling of “family” in the pet community. Each staff member undergoes training on dog body language, health, and safety to ensure the utmost quality when dealing with customer’s pets. They are charter members of The Dog Gurus, who are industry leaders in safe off-leash play. They are also Pet Tech trained in dog and cat emergency care.

     

    Priced at $1,450,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure within the company. Their goal is to create a fun and safe environment where dogs come to play and learn and where pet parents can confidently place their trust in the business’s standards of care. They are an enrichment center, not just a standard doggie daycare!

    PRICE $1,450,000 CASH FLOW $382,861

Advertising/Marketing/Media/Print/Production (4)

  • Branding and Marketing Firm with 26% Profit Margin

    This multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm has a fully trained core staff and the ability to adapt to any market ebb and flow thanks to consultants and freelance workers being contracted as needed. The core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies. With a 29% profit margin, it’s fair to say that their work experience and dedication to the field is paying off. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless.

     

    Primarily working with financial/retirement services, insurance, technology and healthcare categories, this agency is involved in industries that are playing an important role right now and using this opportunity to catch up in the digital space. The core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $11,500,000, this company is prime for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $11,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Nationwide Multi-Year Government Contracts for Full-Service Marketing & PR

    Established 1996 and with multi-year sub-contracts ranging from $60-$420K per year for three to five years, this award winning full-service public relations and marketing firm has been serving their clients statewide, nationally and internationally for 20+ years.  Average value of prime contracts is $1M for 5-6 years and majority of their clients are recurring with 10+ year average tenure. They have a total of 12 clients, with multiple being contracts with state and federal agencies. One of their main clients with 6 multi-year contracts is recognized nationwide and internationally for its leadership and innovation and in many ways is ten years ahead of other states because this company has more experience in next generation intelligent transportation systems than any other communications and training firms in the country. From their Southeast US 5,500 square feet office with $300K worth of assets that includes digital production equipment, the firm provides public relations, digital marketing & advertising, knowledge transfer, research & strategic services all under one roof. With a 25% profit margin, they primarily serve government agencies, but also have clients in construction, automotive, and emerging technologies. In addition, they have a robust marketing process that has culminated in 8000+ industry leaders and decisionmakers who receive company e-newsletters on a regular basis.

    The firm’s reputation is so strong in the transportation industry it is consistently sought out as a teaming partner by an impressive list of engineering, intelligent transportation, and planning firms Like HDR, Atkins and Booz & Allen. They win large, impressive contracts competing against strong incumbents due to their proprietary processes and scalable platforms for RFP responses, as well as strong business relationships.

    They have a team of 31 highly skilled fulltime employees that include a creative director who has won numerous awards for the branding, websites and marketing collateral he has developed for this company’s clients. In general, many employees have 10+ year tenure with the company and have professional backgrounds in journalism.

    With the results of the presidential election, the public relations industry is convinced that an infrastructure bill is imminent and this company is positioned to ride this wave of opportunity and grow because they have been leading outreach efforts for next generation intelligent transportation systems and connected vehicles for 15 years. In addition, they have more experience in these future focused specialties than any other communications and training firm in the nation.

    PRICE $4,200,000 CASH FLOW $990,945

  • Mailer Fulfillment, Creative Design & Printing

    This Niche mailer fulfillment, creative design and printing company has a consistent client base with multiple nonprofit, medical, and dental practices and handles a majority of their print marketing and informational pieces. They have over 300 current clients that utilize their services for education seminars and conferences. This also alludes to their excellent and abnormal profit margin that speaks for itself at 23% in the printing and fulfillment field. This mid-sized establishment has been servicing and creating business partnerships within the Omaha area for over 30 years. They continue to receive accolades for their customers service and work quality. This marketing and printing firm has the capability to handle a wider variety of services than firms bigger and smaller than their current size. Thanks to their skilled and established staff of 3 part time employees and 15 full time employees which include 2 Managers, a senior customer service representative, 8 production workers, 2 maintenance workers etc... they are able to remain flexible on jobs that bigger companies would not be able to accept and skilled enough to be more efficient and reliable than smaller firms. Thanks to their excellent work ethic and reputation, many of their top clients have been operating with them for 5 or more years and a few have been repeating customers for 10+ years.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand further into the online field required of today’s market. The current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could also be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager if new management would prefer a hands-off management style.

     

    With a purchase price of $990,000 and a down payment of $99,000, a buyer would see a return of $198,699 in the first year after debt payments! This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy they have built over the years.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $345,743

  • Bar and Grill

    This Omaha Metro Area’s Newest Bar and Grill has really brought a fun and upbeat spot for many to relax and dine in.  The owner had more than 20 years of industry experience owning and operating other bars in which this location was established in November of 2008. Individuals enjoy delicious American food favorites with cold beverages from the bar and grill. This facility features a casual dining atmosphere with great food and drink selections.  It has also been a great attraction for many to watch the fine world of sports. 

    PRICE $210,000 CASH FLOW $72,000

Maintenance/Service/Trades (16)

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • This New York electrical company has been in business for almost 30 years! They provide quality work at a more competitive price than its competitors. The companies experience enables it to tackle small projects with the same level of commitment given to larger projects. This company has 4 office personnel specializing in different areas such as operations, sales, and clients. The company also has 1 outsourced CFO, as well as 20 electricians staffed. They service the 5 burrows of New York City which includes the Bronx, Brooklyn, Manhattan, Queens, and Staten Island.

     

    This company offers a large variety of electrical services. These services include lighting, power, access control, fire alarms, analytics, system installation, and security systems. This business specializes in establishing BIM contracts for clients using industry-based software. Using these tools make the design and installation of electrical projects more efficient and cost effective. Current work includes working with electrical contractors and large company buildings. This company has also worked with transportation businesses specializing in rail, bus, and elevator services.

     

    With a down payment of $373,500, a buyer can expect a 95% return on investment in the first year after debt payments! This company is dedicated to providing quality and reliable electric work to its clients. Due to the fact that is company has been in business for almost 30 years, a majority of their clients are repeat or referrals. This electric company is ready to leave a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that will continue its effective work and legacy. 

    PRICE $3,735,000 CASH FLOW $933,667

  • Passive Des Moines Home Renovation Company

     

    This passive Des Moines based home renovation company is stable and has huge growth potential! Boasting an amazing reputation which leads to repeat clients and referrals, this company has more than $1,600,000 in the pipeline for Q1 alone, which annualizes out to $6.4M in projected revenue! There is nearly $1M in assets including the company’s 14 vans, power tools, and inventory. This well-built operation is passive – with the owner dedicating only 5 to 7 hours a week to the business - but also boasts room to grow if an ambitious new owner wants to lean into growth opportunities. A well-executed hiring campaign to increase the volume of work, as well as possibly opening a satellite location, could drive this business even higher. 

     

    This experienced team provides a “one-stop-shop” approach to residential kitchen and bath remodels. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every installation by completing all work in house except for countertop instillation. Their complete showroom and an onsite designer provide 3D renderings for projects that allows for stress-free selections. Most projects happen in the kitchen (45%), the bathroom (45%), as well as other remodeling projects throughout the home. A 12% down payment of $677,829 returns $718,052 in the first year even after debt payments!

     

    An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross-trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure with the company. Leads manage the projects, and the general manager handles the day-to-day operations with the help of an office manager. The team works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. office building. The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and is willing to lease to the next owner. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has a long-standing relationship with customers; they are able to keep their service area within a 30-mile radius of the Des Moines metro.

    PRICE $5,648,580 CASH FLOW $1,569,050

  • Civil Firm Focused on Roads & Excavation with $33M in Backlog

    With over $13M worth of assets included in the purchase of the business, the current owner could actually collect more income by selling his equipment than he will be with the purchase of this business. He is choosing to sell his business because continuing to employ his staff and allowing someone to build on the business’s current legacy is more valuable to him than the A/R that his equipment could gather. Thanks to these assets, the purchase of this business is over 55% collateralized. This business is at the top of their field. They are specialists in excavation and utility installation for road projects and large site retail and industrial jobs in their service area of primarily Virginia along with Kentucky and West Virginia. They boast 50% repeat customers. Their client base is made up of 36% municipalities, 22% government, 23% schools, and 19% commercial property owners. Their staff is able to handle a wide variety of clients both in geographic location and in contract types thanks to their size and skill. The team has over 120 members including 3 SVP’s, 8 superintendents, 1 office manager, 1 administrator/billing, and +/- 110 laborers dependent on projects and locations. It is pertinent to note that all staff have signed an agreement to stay on through completion of their current projects, so long as they remain at the same salary and bonus structure.

     

    The current owner performs general oversight as a preference, as he is in his mid-80’s. His passion for the job is clearly contagious, as he has multiple personnel that have been employed for 10+ years, but he’s decided it’s time to retire. Established over 50 years ago, the longevity of this business has resulted in an excellent reputation for high-quality work, completed on time, every time. This long-standing esteem coupled with $33M of work in progress and new bids in the pipeline is manifesting in a projected revenue of $28M for 2022.

     

    Priced to sell at $22,500,000, this excavation company has it all with repeat clientele, profitable contracts, and excellent name recognition. Not to mention the far over-collateralization of purchase with the $13M in included assets. The services this business offers are deemed essential and the industry as a whole is pandemic proof. In addition to this stability, new ownership is also poised to benefit from the increase in business and revenue brought on by the 2021 infrastructure bill which is providing natural growth in the construction industry. As an added layer of faith in the business, not only is the current owner prepared to collect less income from the sale of the business rather than the sale of equipment to keep the business running and the employees working, he is also offering to finance or equity roll 15% of the purchase! We believe that this shows extremely good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the next owner. There has never been a better time to get into the construction business and, given all of the positive points listed above, this excavation company is ready to capitalize on these incredible opportunities!

    PRICE $22,500,000 CASH FLOW $7,484,031

  • Remotely Operated Commercial Construction

     

    This remotely operated commercial construction company already has $1.7M+ on the books for 2022! With no physical location, it helps to keep the overhead costs low and the job ability flexible.  The business is based in Florida but works regularly across the US, utilizing local 1099 contractors and traveling as needed. There are a couple hundred 1099 contractors on the books that are available to be used, depending on what is needed by the job.  Their primary focus is complete teardown and remodeling of existing commercial locations.  There has been a handful of new builds over the years, but that is rare.

     

    Currently, there is no advertising or marketing being done.  The business runs 100% on repeat clients and positive word of mouth referrals!  A big growth opportunity would be to get the name out a bit more locally to expand the customer base.  Another place to grow would be to start working with general contractors and property managers to put maintenance contracts into place.  The company is already able to handle maintenance issues on the job site, and while there are no recurring contracts in place, they could be easily added!

     

    The seller is looking at retirement options and what may be next for himself and his family.  At a purchase price of $1,250,000 and a down payment of $187,500, a buyer would see a 113% return on investment in the first year, making this a perfect opportunity for a first-time buyer or seasoned entrepreneur. 

     

    PRICE $1,250,000 CASH FLOW $407,169

  • Glazing Contractor with 35k sq. ft. Factory & $7.5M in Backlog

    There is amazing growth potential for a new owner of this OKC Glazing Contractor; expanding services into Texas, Arkansas, Kansas, and Missouri would give a huge revenue boost! With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this company has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the business has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,020,000, the factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place for this business. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $252,500 returns $281,137 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,020,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • Earthwork, Shoreline Protection, Site Prep in Texas – 90+ FT Employees

    This Earthwork & Industrial Site Prep business completes 225 jobs per year, with a minimum of 20 active projects at one time!  Located in Victoria, Texas and with 90+ FT employees, their average client tenure is 13 years. Sale size ranges from $10k to $1.5M, with an average of $350k. With $9.4M in WIP and over $3M in their pipeline, work is plentiful for this well-diversified team. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 30% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 70% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own 90+ person team completing the work, which boosts profit margin.

     

    Over $7M in assets includes $5M in heavy equipment, $1.2M in vehicles, $57k worth of trailers, tools valued at $365k, and office furniture & software worth $379k. The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month; this rate would be kept the same under new ownership. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years where they have a 75% win rate; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 25% success rate on those. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area to other gulf states for high margin erosion control projects and actively pursuing more bids would certainly lead to an increase in revenue. There is currently a very limited sales team and little to no marketing. Working Capital is $2.1M and would transfer to the new owner.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,154,501

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Rental Business with 36% Profit Margin

     

    This rental company boasts a profit margin of 36% and nearly $15M in assets! Services include hauling, installation, dismantlement, rental, and sale of frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms. On average, 60% of revenue comes from rentals. They are highly diversified, with 15 customers making up 70% of their revenue and 95% of their clients recurring, with 95% continually recurring; including general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair & installation contractors, there is no shortage of projects! The company is currently operating at a 36% profit margin, which is very strong. They are able to offer a wide range of services thanks to the 60+ skilled employees on staff, including 7 office staff, 3 mechanics, 3 field managers, 4 drivers, and 25-40 laborers.

     

    Boasting $4M in hydro mobile inventory (95+ units), they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 3-5 units. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market. In addition, the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill directly caters to this company’s core customer base and will certainly increase their revenue in the coming years.  The current workload consists of 45% restoration and 55% new construction. This company does little to no marketing or advertising due to their recurring clients or person.  A new owner could absolutely grow by simply adding a marketing and sales plan.

     

    Priced at $18,750,000, this business is 80% collateralized with the assets included in the sale!  It is positioned to grow in the contracting space by accepting more invitations, moving into neighboring cities, and expanding types of fleet, such as forklifts & drilling bores.  

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $5,304,421

  • Wireless Tech Company with $9M Top Line Potential

    This business with a 29% profit margin has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $8,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • 70+ Years for KC HVAC Design, Fabrication, and Installation

    With a 22,000 sq. ft. fabrication shop and 41 skilled personnel on staff, this HVAC design and installation company has been in operation for 70 years! Clients for this business include education, manufacturing, industrial, medical, government, and municipalities. The team is comprised of 9 office staff, along with 4 in the shop, 7 service staff, and 21 field employees. Not only do they specialize in new construction and renovation ventures, but they successfully work on refrigeration systems and manage projects as prime contractors as well.  The team focuses mainly on new construction (40%) and renovations (45%), and their service department accounts for 15% of annual revenues.  Prime contracts amount to about 15-20% of work performed. The service department performs approximately $1.5M per year, while hard bid projects are in the $10.5M range.

    This multi-faceted business is held in high regard by the general contractors, architects, and engineers in the Kansas City Metro.  Their increasing revenues show that this healthy business is growing organically through positive word-of-mouth reviews and high-quality workmanship. 

    Priced at $1,725,000, a new owner could easily continue the current successful trajectory, as well as grow the business by expanding the maintenance and service contracts.  The business operates from a complex that has ample space for all current operations with room for continued expansion.  A large 30,000 square foot building features a 22,000 square foot shop which is the fabrication hub and the remaining spaces (8,000 square feet) are utilized as storage warehousing.  The lots are both paved and offer plenty of parking and working space.   

    PRICE $1,725,000 CASH FLOW $676,827

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • Roofing with Storm Restoration – Pandemic & Recession Proof

    This roofing company with storm restoration services boasted over $1.4M in cash flow in 2021 and has 16 employees in place between two locations on the East Coast, including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps.  This full team allows the current owner to focus strictly on the oversight of the sales division.  Even still, he is willing to stay on board for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition.  All of the labor is outsourced, allowing this company to see a lower CapEx and liability.  They service largely residential clients (95%) within a 2-hour radius from each location (Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland).  Services include roof inspections & installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, windows, floors, decks, etc., depending on the customer needs. 

     

    In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hail storm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. After being in business for 20+ years, they have learned to utilize this information by increasing their cold call and door to door sales to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof.  Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most of their claim. Coupled with their high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), their client list of over 5,000 people, and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth.  Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    The current owner is willing to carry up to 20% of the $2.85M purchase price, which shows confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully.  Based on a 2020-2021 average cash flow, a down payment of $427,500 would return $481,751 in the first year after debt payments!  Also included with this purchase is the 10 vehicles needed for the sales team, allowing a new owner to step in and hit the ground running from day one.

    PRICE $2,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,406,331

  • $18M in Backlog: Commercial Roofing w/60% Repeat Clients

     

    This 100% commercial roofing company has $18M in backlog (committed contracts), with 60% repeat clients!  With a prime location in Akron, Ohio, they provide maintenance & repair work (60%) and new builds (40%) for their clients within a120-mile radius.  The large, well-established and trained team of 25 admin staff and 60 metal workers & craftsmen self-performs all of the work from start to finish.  Included with the sale of the business is over $6M in assets, including $3.65M in vehicles & equipment and $40K+ in inventory. 

     

    This area is well known for their requirements of union-based employees and businesses for construction or repair work. Thankfully, this business is well intertwined with local unions, and 75% of their current projects come from those established partnerships. While they do some public work with these ties, expanding their partnerships and open bids to include more municipal work would be a huge opportunity for growth. Other opportunities would include expanding into residential work or growing the new installation side of business as their current primary focus is maintenance and repair.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000 a 10% down payment of $1,650,000 returns $1,509,744 in the first year after debt payments. The current owner is selling as part of his retirement strategy.  Though he is active in oversight and management, he is willing to stay on for 2 years post-close to not only train & transition, but to help find and train his replacement.  This established business comes with a loyal client base, an experienced team of industry experts, and a reputation that keeps word of mouth marketing effective all year round! New ownership can expect to continue this business’s recent growth streak without investing excessive resources into expanding opportunities.

     

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,712,096

  • K-12 Architecture Firm with Nationwide Clients: 25+ Expert Employees

    This firm specializes in the planning and for nationwide clients, specifically in the K-12, university, multi-family housing and hospitals. This extremely skilled staff of 28 full-time employees split between their two offices, consists of several architects, interior designers, and administrators. The team has a reputation of excellent customer service that has been established since this firm’s opening 16 years ago. Thanks to their locations in Oklahoma City, OK and Dallas, TX this firm is set to do exceptionally well in 2022 with their current financial information annualizing to show over $6.1M in revenue for 2022. In addition to the reputation, staff, and broad client base, this business also comes with $3,800,000 of backlog to allow new ownership to continue business operations and growth. As a demonstration of faith in the business, 10% seller financing and 15% equity roll is being offered. The current ownership is looking to retire, and they have offered a training/transition period of 2-3 years to ensure a smooth change of ownership.

     

    The owner primarily handles overall management, he has no reason to believe that a change of ownership would lead to a loss of clients or employees. This is especially true with the previously mentioned lengthy transition period offered. His salary has been accounted for in our cash flow analysis and the above listed cash flow. In addition to the excellent growth, the business comes with over $1.1M worth of assets. Not only do these assets afford new ownership the opportunity to ride the current growth pattern, they also offer an additional route of growth with no additional staff or purchases needed. New ownership could easily add hospital architecture to their niche portfolio for new growth.

     

    This business has been priced at $4,350,000 due to the recent cash flow, long-standing client base, 16 years of service and reputation, multiple locations, wide geographic range of client base, over $1.1M in assets included, 28 skilled employees, and the outstanding offered training period from new ownership. All of these amenities included leads new ownership to the ability to continue business as is and grow with expanded services at no foreseen additional costs.

    PRICE $4,350,000 CASH FLOW $1,201,592

  • IT Company with Consulting, Shared Servers, and Managed Services

    This IT and consulting business has a profit margin of 22%! Due to the convergence of two businesses, they offer technology managed services including server architecture and design, Microsoft office 360, system backups, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services which is an add on for current services. This diversity of services has afforded them the opportunity for cross advertising to their client base. This, and their excellent local reputation, has led them to a client base made up of 85% repeat customers annually. The business’s staff consists of 9 W2 employees including 2 Sales Associates, 2.5 IT Engineers, and 2 office administrators. The current owner handles general oversite and offers assistance to the team. The skilled staff would easily be able to absorb the owner’s responsibilities. This IT business has seen consistent growth in recent years and is on a path towards exponential growth. In fact, 2022 is expected to have a revenue of over $11M based on the first five months of the year!

     

    Established in 2011, this business is located in Omaha, NE. Their current service area is primarily throughout Eastern NE, but they have the potential for worldwide clients. New ownership has countless possibilities for further growth, or the chance to relax and enjoy the current organic growth path the team is on as 2022 is set to be their best year yet with an annualized cash flow of $2.2M!

     

    Priced at $8,915,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the lucky new owners. The current owner believes in his business so much so that he is willing to roll 10% equity and offer a 15% promissory note. We believe that this shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner! In addition to this show of good faith, the owner has offered a one-year training period to ensure a smooth transition. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service or expanding the customer base outside of Eastern Nebraska.

    PRICE $8,915,000 CASH FLOW $2,228,767

  • Well Established Full-Service Civil Engineering

    This full-service civil engineering firm has $2M worth of work on the books for 2022 and current numbers are annualizing to show that they are set to make $2.5M in 2022 which is higher than pre-pandemic numbers. With a profit margin of 23%, the 2022 annualized cash flow is $408,956. Based in Chicago, this firm has been in service since 1955 and with their excellent local reputation and established government contracts, this second-generation company is primed for continued growth. Services offered include Civil Engineering, Surveying, Construction Management, Forensic Engineering, GIS and CAD. They currently have a customer base that is primarily made up of government and municipal work (75%) and also includes education (8%), contractors (9%), and private companies (8%). The two current owners work full time for the business. Owner 1 handles general management and oversight as well as marketing while owner 2 is the managing engineer and senior project manager. The current team operates out of a 6000 square foot office space. There are 11 total employees on staff, outside of the owners. This includes 3 engineers, 1 surveyor, 1 CADD manager, 3 survey team members, and 3 administrative assistants. Their team boasts impressive credentials and experience beyond many of their competitors. These qualifications, along with the firm’s long-established reputation in local governments and municipalities give the firm a strong competitive advantage when bidding on projects. Because of the strong team in place, a new owner would not need to be a licensed engineer, as the staff on hand already has the necessary licenses.

    At a price of $1,050,000 and a down payment of $105,000, a buyer would receive $164,611 after debt payments, resulting in a 157% return on investment in the first year! The existing team is set up to continue operating after the current owners leave. However, the sellers are also open to staying on as strategic partners and helping the new owner grow the business in the years to come. Other opportunities for new ownership include hiring another surveyor or EIT to bring on additional projects. This business is p

    PRICE $1,050,000 CASH FLOW $330,965

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Health & Wellness Company Serving Employees

     

    This health and wellness company serves employers across various industries, and boasts strong client loyalty – with a 100% renewal rate in 2020! The company provides health and wellness programs which includes numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company also has extremely low overhead due to not requiring a commercial office space. The intangible asset of its long-term relationships with clients can’t be understated, providing a stable base for future growth.
     
    The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.
     
    Most clients have a one-year contract, and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.
     
    Priced at $490,000, a 10% down payment of $49,000 returns $118,046 in the first year after debt payments – a 241% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!
     

     

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $192,443

  • Professional & Clerical Staffing Agency

    This staffing agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their extremely diverse nationwide client base in the professional and clerical fields. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. This includes full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing and payrolling services. These services can be utilized for part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. Located in Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

     

    Certified as a Rhode Island WBE/DBE, many national firms contact this company to partner with them; one such healthcare company was awarded a bid to set up a contact center in Rhode Island and develop the healthcare program for the state. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected in their community and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis. With a turn around time of 2 weeks to 2 months depending on the needs of the client, this business is known for providing exceptional service and always being accessible to their clients.  

     

    Priced at $549,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts.

    PRICE $549,000 CASH FLOW $100,530

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Data Capture & Thermal Label Equipment Sales & Services – $3M+ in Revenue

    With a 96% recurring client base primarily in manufacturing, warehousing, distribution, and logistics, this Georgia-based company had nearly $4M in sales in 2020! This value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Helping their clients succeed for 15 years, this company provides custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few. This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,840,000 CASH FLOW $589,682

  • Nationwide Multi-Year Government Contracts for Full-Service Marketing & PR

    Established 1996 and with multi-year sub-contracts ranging from $60-$420K per year for three to five years, this award winning full-service public relations and marketing firm has been serving their clients statewide, nationally and internationally for 20+ years.  Average value of prime contracts is $1M for 5-6 years and majority of their clients are recurring with 10+ year average tenure. They have a total of 12 clients, with multiple being contracts with state and federal agencies. One of their main clients with 6 multi-year contracts is recognized nationwide and internationally for its leadership and innovation and in many ways is ten years ahead of other states because this company has more experience in next generation intelligent transportation systems than any other communications and training firms in the country. From their Southeast US 5,500 square feet office with $300K worth of assets that includes digital production equipment, the firm provides public relations, digital marketing & advertising, knowledge transfer, research & strategic services all under one roof. With a 25% profit margin, they primarily serve government agencies, but also have clients in construction, automotive, and emerging technologies. In addition, they have a robust marketing process that has culminated in 8000+ industry leaders and decisionmakers who receive company e-newsletters on a regular basis.

    The firm’s reputation is so strong in the transportation industry it is consistently sought out as a teaming partner by an impressive list of engineering, intelligent transportation, and planning firms Like HDR, Atkins and Booz & Allen. They win large, impressive contracts competing against strong incumbents due to their proprietary processes and scalable platforms for RFP responses, as well as strong business relationships.

    They have a team of 31 highly skilled fulltime employees that include a creative director who has won numerous awards for the branding, websites and marketing collateral he has developed for this company’s clients. In general, many employees have 10+ year tenure with the company and have professional backgrounds in journalism.

    With the results of the presidential election, the public relations industry is convinced that an infrastructure bill is imminent and this company is positioned to ride this wave of opportunity and grow because they have been leading outreach efforts for next generation intelligent transportation systems and connected vehicles for 15 years. In addition, they have more experience in these future focused specialties than any other communications and training firm in the nation.

    PRICE $4,200,000 CASH FLOW $990,945

  • Wireless Tech Company with $9M Top Line Potential

    This business with a 29% profit margin has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $8,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

B2B: Services/Wholesalers/Suppliers (24)

  • Commercial Roofing in PA – 90 Employees

    With over $14.3M in sales in 2020, this commercial roofing company has 90 W2 employees in place! Established for over 20 years and with 100% commercial clients, their focus is on larger industrial and institutional projects; project size ranges from $75k to $3.75M. Offering reroofing (50% of their revenue) new construction (40%) and repair & maintenance (10%) within a 75-mile radius of Pittsburgh, this team of 90 employees is comprised of 75 craftsmen and sheet metal workers, along with 15 salaried support staff. The company subs out only as needed based on project size and ancillary services in the contract. Their clientele is a diverse assortment of consultants, general contractors, and private owners; this business is highly sought after in the greater Pittsburgh region.  Revenue reached over $14.3M in 2020, and 2021 is looking highly profitable, with over $16M already in their backlog. With over $9M in assets, the bank loan is over 70% collateralized.

     

    The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-to-month basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The  non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction.

     

    Priced at $12,250,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Pursuing more maintenance work and roofing-related sheet metal projects would certainly increase revenue. With already long-standing client relationships in place, organic growth is inevitable if services are expanded.

    PRICE $12,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,614,063

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Specialty Equipment Fleet: Rental and Maintenance with Two Locations

    This specialty equipment business currently has $4M in backlog; applying the average 19% profit margin, this business could see profits over $3M in 2022! Their services are rental, sales, repair, and maintenance of niche equipment, including foundation & directional drilling equipment, cranes, and rotators. With a primary location in Phoenix, Arizona and a second location in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to service the Southwestern sector of the United States. Their clients consist of general & specialized contractors, foundation companies, electrical companies, waste management, infrastructure firms, and private owners of large equipment. Included with the purchase of this business is over $7.9M in equipment and inventory, making the business 68% collateralized. The team includes a CFO, Project and Operating Consultant, Mechanic, 2 Sales Representatives, 1 Accountant, and 1 Yard Manager.  The owner oversees sales for only 15-20 hours a week, which the COO is being mentored to absorb.

     

    Established over 15 years ago, this well-known business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. Other growth opportunities include increasing rental inventory and expanding their reach into Texas. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright.

     

    Priced at $11,600,000 this business has the potential to return $1,111,409 in 2022 based on the 2020+2022 average cash flow. The current owner believes in the businesses onward & upward revenues and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 15% promissory note. This shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $11,600,000 CASH FLOW $2,700,000

  • IT Company with Consulting, Shared Servers, and Managed Services

    This IT and consulting business has a profit margin of 22%! Due to the convergence of two businesses, they offer technology managed services including server architecture and design, Microsoft office 360, system backups, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services which is an add on for current services. This diversity of services has afforded them the opportunity for cross advertising to their client base. This, and their excellent local reputation, has led them to a client base made up of 85% repeat customers annually. The business’s staff consists of 9 W2 employees including 2 Sales Associates, 2.5 IT Engineers, and 2 office administrators. The current owner handles general oversite and offers assistance to the team. The skilled staff would easily be able to absorb the owner’s responsibilities. This IT business has seen consistent growth in recent years and is on a path towards exponential growth. In fact, 2022 is expected to have a revenue of over $11M based on the first five months of the year!

     

    Established in 2011, this business is located in Omaha, NE. Their current service area is primarily throughout Eastern NE, but they have the potential for worldwide clients. New ownership has countless possibilities for further growth, or the chance to relax and enjoy the current organic growth path the team is on as 2022 is set to be their best year yet with an annualized cash flow of $2.2M!

     

    Priced at $8,915,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the lucky new owners. The current owner believes in his business so much so that he is willing to roll 10% equity and offer a 15% promissory note. We believe that this shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner! In addition to this show of good faith, the owner has offered a one-year training period to ensure a smooth transition. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service or expanding the customer base outside of Eastern Nebraska.

    PRICE $8,915,000 CASH FLOW $2,228,767

  • Climate Controlled Food Logistics

    Since 1989, this business has provided high-quality climate-controlled logistics solutions. Along with their excellent and long-standing reputation, the purchase of this business comes with over $1.2M in assets. This skilled team consists of 28 total employees including 3 team leads, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, 6 warehouse workers, and 2 dispatchers which allows them to self-perform all driving, they do not use any outside contractors. These transportation services are focused in climate-controlled food deliveries with shipments ranging from 100-20,000lbs, they also offer warehousing, but distribution makes up 90% of their annual revenue. The business has a 20,000 square feet location in Milwaukee WI, 18,800 of which is warehouse space and 1,200 is office space. Their client base is primarily food production companies that need product distributed to stores. 85% of their customers are repeat business.

     

    Both of the current owners are active in the business and a replacement or retainment salary has been accounted for in our cash flow analysis and financial information. One owner handles financials, sales, and pricing and the other handles overseeing the leasing, purchasing, and maintenance of equipment. One person could do both roles with the addition of an outside book keeper, however, to ensure a smooth transition, the seller has agreed to stay up to 3 years. Growth opportunities that new owners could pursue moving forward include building on current partnerships: increasing the amount of storage being utilized by these clients or transitioning clients from one side of business to taking advantage of both the warehousing and transportation services offered.

     

    Priced at $2,525,000 a down payment of $315,625 returns $334,858 in the first year after debt payments. The owners have offered 12.5% seller financing with purchase, we believe this shows good faith in the future of the business. This business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth that has been enjoyed in recent years. 

    PRICE $2,525,000 CASH FLOW $704,107

  • Established Plumbing and Piping Company

    This plumbing and piping company has a client base made up of 80% repeat customers! Based in Michigan, this business is well established with an excellent local reputation. Services offered include plumbing (which makes up 75% of service base) and pipe-fitting (25% of service area). This business comes with a well-established team of 11 including 7 FT field technicians, 2 PT estimators, 1 PT bookkeeper, and 1 PT administrative worker. Current ownership works full time overseeing estimates and visiting job sites weekly. They have offered a transition period of up to 3 years to ensure a smooth transition and to provide all information and skills needed for new ownership to enjoy further growth. A main reason for the success this business is enjoying is their extreme focus on customer service, especially the quality and timeliness of jobs.

     

    Situated in a growing industry in a strong location, clear growth opportunities present new ownership a route to great rewards in the face of growing competition. Outside of receiving work from both open and closed bids, the current owner’s only effort put towards recruiting new clients is cold calls when they have time, and a marketing campaign can elevate this business to an even larger client base. With their high rate of return clients, this additional marketing or advertising campaign could result in ongoing dividends of returning clients for years to come. A well-planned hiring campaign to bring in more laborers offers another path to growth. The team works out of 5,000 sq. ft. building with 3,500 sq. ft. dedicated to the shop, and 1,500 sq. ft. to the office. There is plenty of room to expand operations and bring in more laborers.

     

    Priced at $1,250,000, a 12.5% down payment of $156,250 returns $164,706 in the first year after debt payments! This established and profitable plumbing service business is ready for new ownership to enjoy currently established partnerships and continue to create new ones. 

    PRICE $1,250,000 CASH FLOW $347,503

  • Mailer Fulfillment, Creative Design & Printing

    This Niche mailer fulfillment, creative design and printing company has a consistent client base with multiple nonprofit, medical, and dental practices and handles a majority of their print marketing and informational pieces. They have over 300 current clients that utilize their services for education seminars and conferences. This also alludes to their excellent and abnormal profit margin that speaks for itself at 23% in the printing and fulfillment field. This mid-sized establishment has been servicing and creating business partnerships within the Omaha area for over 30 years. They continue to receive accolades for their customers service and work quality. This marketing and printing firm has the capability to handle a wider variety of services than firms bigger and smaller than their current size. Thanks to their skilled and established staff of 3 part time employees and 15 full time employees which include 2 Managers, a senior customer service representative, 8 production workers, 2 maintenance workers etc... they are able to remain flexible on jobs that bigger companies would not be able to accept and skilled enough to be more efficient and reliable than smaller firms. Thanks to their excellent work ethic and reputation, many of their top clients have been operating with them for 5 or more years and a few have been repeating customers for 10+ years.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand further into the online field required of today’s market. The current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could also be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager if new management would prefer a hands-off management style.

     

    With a purchase price of $990,000 and a down payment of $99,000, a buyer would see a return of $198,699 in the first year after debt payments! This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy they have built over the years.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $345,743

  • Janitorial on 4 Islands with 40+ Employees

    Since 2005, this commercial janitorial franchise of 40+ employees has offered its diverse services to the Hawaiian Islands! With four locations, one on each of Hawaii’s most populated islands (Kauai, Oahu, Maui, Molokai), this business benefits from excellent name recognition, resulting in repeat clients and little need for advertising. Their services include but aren’t limited to office cleaning and deep cleaning commercially. These 27+ repeat commercial clients include some of the largest entities in Hawaii, such as industrial agricultural companies. They also have the exclusive license in Hawaii to clean one of America’s most popular drapery brands and are Green Seal certified. Their experienced general managers and technicians are self-sufficient, helping to generate over $2.8 million in sales in 2021, and leaving the owner with minimal responsibilities. 

    The increase of cleanliness and hygienic standards has helped to increase revenue which has been maintained through 2021, as companies, and employees, have a greater appreciation and demand for a clean and sanitary workplace. Their Green Seal certification ensures the highest quality standards in cleaning practices, instilling a high level of trust between this cleaning business and their repeat clientele. Between this certification and their drapery cleaning license, they can provide exclusive services that cannot be found anywhere else in Hawaii. 

    Any potential owner can feel comfortable knowing that the current owner will train for a one year to assist in learning the ropes of contract renewals and management on multiple islands. A new owner will have the flexibility to continue to run the business as is or expand as desired into the residential sector or to other Hawaiian Islands. Priced at $2,350,000, this business will produce $282,481 after debt payments in the first year!

    PRICE $2,350,000 CASH FLOW $639,282

  • Louisiana Asbestos Inspections & Environmental Services

    This asbestos and environmental services company has maintained a 21% profit margin year over year, and included in the sale is over $200k in assets, including several trucks, trailers, an XRF analyzer, and other equipment. They complete work in three states – Louisiana, Arkansas, and Mississippi! With a diverse services list, a wide variety of clients are brought on to benefit from the work of the specialist staff. Services include asbestos abatement (30%), asbestos air monitoring (20%), asbestos inspection (20%), water sampling (20%), mold sampling (5%), and lead inspections (5%).  They do have the ability to train & license for asbestos workers at their facility as well, though this has not been heavily pursued as a growth opportunity. With the abundance of services offered, their services extend to municipalities, commercial contracts, banks, residential, and school boards.

     

    At their current location, a new owner would be taking over an office, 7 total storage facilities, equipment shed, and covered parking area (all at the same location).  The seller does own the real estate and is willing to rent it back to the next owner for $2,500/month.  This amount has been accounted for and adjusted in the provided cash flow. 

     

    While the seller does assist with bidding, the employees on staff are trained to do so as well.  The seller was in and out in 2020 due to a cancer diagnosis (now in remission), and the business still saw growth from 2019-2020 in both revenue and profit. 

     

    At a price of $570,000, and a down payment of $85,500, a buyer would expect to see a return of $84,808 in the first year after debt payments!

    PRICE $570,000 CASH FLOW $148,301

  • Warehousing, Corporate Relocation & Moving – Absentee Owned

     

    The highly qualified staff of moving coordinators, movers,  packers, and drivers are considered experts in the industry, with nearly 300 employees at this warehousing, corporate relocation, and moving company.  The organizational chart is exceptionally well-developed, with a full senior and mid-level management team in place, allowing the seller to step back to an absentee position, spending less than 10 hours on the business per month!  This qualified team also includes drivers, movers, marketing, sales, call center, and IT members, who are all considered experts in the industry.  With 11 locations in the Pacific Northwest, this company has been able to easily fulfill their clients’ needs since their inception in 2013.  Their client base is diverse, and sees an incredible 65% repeat and referral base, with a focus in military, residential, business, and corporate moving and storage.  Services include warehousing & distribution, military contracts, office & business moving, residential moving, storage, and packing & crating.  With the purchase of this opportunity, a buyer would receive over $10M in assets, proving this to be a truly turn-key operation.

     

    Of the 11 current locations, 3 of the spaces are leased, while the other 8 are owned by the company.  There would be an option to continue leasing all locations, to be negotiated between the buyer and seller.  The owner is absentee and lives out of state, after having spent the last few years slowly transitioning out of the business.  Currently, he spends about 10 hours/month on the business, only participating in two monthly team meetings to get updates from his staff.  Why sell if he is truly absentee?  The goal at hand is for the current owner to be able to move into other interests, as he owns commercial property and is looking to deploy more capital on those ventures. 

     

    The business has recently started exploring the mobile storage/pods, allowing them to provide further services to different types of clients and continue the overall growth.  Other growth opportunities include further small, inexpensive acquisitions to expand the territory and adding server farm moving and hauling.  At a purchase price of $22,500,000, and with the assets on hand, a buyer’s contribution would be 60% collateralized by the business assets alone!  There is an option for the seller to not only provide a 10% seller carry, but to also retain 10% in equity if desired.  On top of that, he will stay on board for 6 months-1 year to ensure a smooth transition.  This is being done to show the vested interest in the ongoing success of the business post-close.  

    PRICE $23,000,000 CASH FLOW $3,911,487

  • Staffing Firm with Niche in CPA & HR Placement

    This professional staffing & recruiting firm, based in Kansas, generates 80% of its revenue from recurring clients! This firm has been established for more than 35 years, and has more than 130 clients with strong long-term client relationships. Focusing on the fields of HR and accounting, the firm provides both skilled executives such as CFOs or HR directors (60% of revenue) and temporary staff (40% of revenue). They have over 180 in-progress jobs, representing more than $2,000,000 in total incoming revenue! An additional $1,000,000 of revenue is represented by jobs in negotiation. With an increasing trend of remote work and a demand for skilled professionals after 2021, there has never been a better time to transition into the staffing industry, which is on pace to set new records in 2022.

     This is a family business that has been around since 1985, with the current, second-generation owner taking over back in 2012. They have plenty of room to grow and add more team members at the current location, without having to find a larger space.

     The owner is willing to sell the business outright, or partner with a new investor to help grow the business over the next several years. He currently assists with recruiting, though there are other team members who can do this, along with managing the sales team.  Possible growth opportunities include hiring additional recruiters, expanding the company’s activity in the HR field, and branching out into other skilled fields like legal or engineering.

     With a solid reputation, and being established over 35 years, this company is well-suited for the next owner to step in and continue the legacy without a hitch!

    PRICE $6,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,450,625

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Upstate New York Environmental Services

     

    This upstate New York company provides environmental services regionally and has generally low inventory, as everything needed is purchase based on the job at hand.  This company provides asbestos removal, lead remediation, and fireproofing services.  They are consistently seeing year over year growth and hit over $8M in revenue in 2021!  They have been established in upstate New York since 2012.

     

    Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant. 

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Priced at $898,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $147,250 in the first year after debt payments – a 131% return on investment! Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

    PRICE $898,000 CASH FLOW $262,089

  • 61% Profit Margin at Salt Lake City Area IT Services Company

     

    This Salt Lake City area IT services company boasts a massive 61% profit margin! Along with providing network infrastructure services, this company also provides the necessary equipment and software their clients need: servers, storage, workstations, security software, virtualization software, etc. Services include firewall implementation & management, endpoint security, ransomware protection, data protection, disaster recovery, business continuity, instant virtualization, and proactive endpoint monitoring and management. The company utilizes specialized software, such as Datto RMM, Datto, BCDR, Autotask PSA, Auvik, Lionguard Scale Computing, DataCore, Windows, Citrix Apps, Citrix Hypervisor, Citrix ADC, and Sophos Central Endpoint. The company boasts high profit margins and has seen year-over-year growth in sales since 2018. In 2020, sales of goods and SaaS accounted for 41% of business while human labor services accounted for 59%.

     

    The owner handles the day-to-day operations, while the two part-time 1099 employees assist with technology health checks, running weekly & monthly reports for clients, adding content to the website, and helping with quotes. The business is run from a home office or on site at client locations; no commercial office space is needed.

     

    Priced at $920,000, a 10% down payment of $92,000 returns $145,681 in the first year after debt payments – a 158% return on investment! With a solid customer base intact and an abundance of documentation on each client, a transition would be seamless for an already existing IT management company that is looking to grow the own client list and revenue.

     

    PRICE $920,000 CASH FLOW $272,641

  • Health & Wellness Company Serving Employees

     

    This health and wellness company serves employers across various industries, and boasts strong client loyalty – with a 100% renewal rate in 2020! The company provides health and wellness programs which includes numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company also has extremely low overhead due to not requiring a commercial office space. The intangible asset of its long-term relationships with clients can’t be understated, providing a stable base for future growth.
     
    The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.
     
    Most clients have a one-year contract, and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.
     
    Priced at $490,000, a 10% down payment of $49,000 returns $118,046 in the first year after debt payments – a 241% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!
     

     

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $192,443

  • Professional & Clerical Staffing Agency

    This staffing agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their extremely diverse nationwide client base in the professional and clerical fields. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. This includes full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing and payrolling services. These services can be utilized for part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. Located in Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

     

    Certified as a Rhode Island WBE/DBE, many national firms contact this company to partner with them; one such healthcare company was awarded a bid to set up a contact center in Rhode Island and develop the healthcare program for the state. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected in their community and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis. With a turn around time of 2 weeks to 2 months depending on the needs of the client, this business is known for providing exceptional service and always being accessible to their clients.  

     

    Priced at $549,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts.

    PRICE $549,000 CASH FLOW $100,530

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • B2B Refrigeration, AC & Maintenance

    This established HVAC company located on Maui is known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company because of their excellent customer service and prompt quality repairs. Established in 1997, they have an excellent team of 16 employees, including trusted technicians, office staff, and installation managers. They split their time between service and installation, with 75% repeat clients on the service end and 50% repeat clients for installation. All of this work equates to an average monthly revenue of $400,000. Due to the excellent reputation and efficient team, the owner of this successful HVAC company enjoys 3-4 months out of state each year! Their reputation exceeds expectations due to the services offered: Commercial Refrigeration Repair & Installation, AC Repair & Installation, Maintenance (90% Commercial). Of those services, 50% is service, and 50% is installation.

     

    The owner has built a solid customer base and provides services to commercial clients like condos, shopping malls, retail stores some of which have relationships with this company spanning 20+ years. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop. The owner currently focuses on general financial and business oversight as well as the bidding process.

     

    Priced at $2,800,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does no marketing; the only advertising they do is from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service they provide. Implementing a marketing strategy would certainly boost sales. A 12.5% down payment of $350,000 returns $412,665 in the first year after debt payments – a 118% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,800,000 CASH FLOW $770,737

  • Rental Business with 36% Profit Margin

     

    This rental company boasts a profit margin of 36% and nearly $15M in assets! Services include hauling, installation, dismantlement, rental, and sale of frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms. On average, 60% of revenue comes from rentals. They are highly diversified, with 15 customers making up 70% of their revenue and 95% of their clients recurring, with 95% continually recurring; including general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair & installation contractors, there is no shortage of projects! The company is currently operating at a 36% profit margin, which is very strong. They are able to offer a wide range of services thanks to the 60+ skilled employees on staff, including 7 office staff, 3 mechanics, 3 field managers, 4 drivers, and 25-40 laborers.

     

    Boasting $4M in hydro mobile inventory (95+ units), they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 3-5 units. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market. In addition, the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill directly caters to this company’s core customer base and will certainly increase their revenue in the coming years.  The current workload consists of 45% restoration and 55% new construction. This company does little to no marketing or advertising due to their recurring clients or person.  A new owner could absolutely grow by simply adding a marketing and sales plan.

     

    Priced at $18,750,000, this business is 80% collateralized with the assets included in the sale!  It is positioned to grow in the contracting space by accepting more invitations, moving into neighboring cities, and expanding types of fleet, such as forklifts & drilling bores.  

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $5,304,421

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • International PR and Event Firm with Passive Ownership

    This international company has been around since 1995, and in that time has been able to establish a diversified clientele base made up of only 30% local and regional clients and 70% international clients! This has been possible thanks to their 64 experienced staff members including 5 management board members and 33FT and 26PT workers operating in graphic design, client relations, media analysis, web services, social media, administration, editing, and outreach. With this excellent chain of command, the owner has been able to transition to a completely passive ownership with no billable hours. This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency currently has a profit margin of 29%. The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management. 

     

    The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well. Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of 64. This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease. 

     

    At a purchase price of $1,500,000 and a down payment of $300,000, a buyer would see a return of $308,766 in the first year after debt payments! This business is established and ready for a new owner to step in!

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Private Equity Group (43)

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • General Contracting, Electrical & Mechanical Services in Growing Area

    This multi-trade service business has an 80% recurring client base and a 33% 3-Year average profit margin!  With an incredibly versatile team of employees in place, 90% of their work is self-performed. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. They have 25+ recurring clients with most of them having an MSA in place. In other cases, even though there is no contract in place, this company is their contractor of choice.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide. 

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. The seller owns the real estate and would rent it to the next owner for $3,500/month. The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner/President (who is willing to stay on as President or GM if desired by Buyer), 2 Project Managers, 3 Superintendents (2 of which are Assistant Project Managers), 1 Bookkeeper, and 1 Office Manager/Safety Coordinator.

    Work is steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office; temperatures in the area are generally in the 40’s-80’s, so they rarely have to hold jobs due to weather delays. There are no licenses limiting geographical expansion.

    PRICE $6,200,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Painting Contractor with 85% Reccurring Clients

    This New York based industrial painting company receives approximately 40 projects a year in municipal infrastructure! Boasting an experienced team of over 90 employees, including 3 project managers, 8 foremen, more than 75 painters and 6 administrative employees, 15 years of quality work has resulted in strong relationships with general contractors and a competitive bidding process that brings in $500K - $1M per project. Included in the purchase is a current backlog of $73M and $2.8M of assets, which includes safety equipment, rigging, and supplies, plus $680K in trucks and trailers. The company’s services include industrial painting and site preparation for jobs such as bridges, tunnels, and transit stations. The company also offers lead abatement and shield integration, services which keep workflow high during the winter months. Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings. Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to stay on for 20 hours a week during an 18 month transition period. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing.  The sellers are willing to roll equity for 12.5% of the purchase price, then do a seller carry for another 12.5% for a total of 25%, as a sign of good faith in the business.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,213,361

  • Specialty Equipment Fleet: Rental and Maintenance with Two Locations

    This specialty equipment business currently has $4M in backlog; applying the average 19% profit margin, this business could see profits over $3M in 2022! Their services are rental, sales, repair, and maintenance of niche equipment, including foundation & directional drilling equipment, cranes, and rotators. With a primary location in Phoenix, Arizona and a second location in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to service the Southwestern sector of the United States. Their clients consist of general & specialized contractors, foundation companies, electrical companies, waste management, infrastructure firms, and private owners of large equipment. Included with the purchase of this business is over $7.9M in equipment and inventory, making the business 68% collateralized. The team includes a CFO, Project and Operating Consultant, Mechanic, 2 Sales Representatives, 1 Accountant, and 1 Yard Manager.  The owner oversees sales for only 15-20 hours a week, which the COO is being mentored to absorb.

     

    Established over 15 years ago, this well-known business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. Other growth opportunities include increasing rental inventory and expanding their reach into Texas. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright.

     

    Priced at $11,600,000 this business has the potential to return $1,111,409 in 2022 based on the 2020+2022 average cash flow. The current owner believes in the businesses onward & upward revenues and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 15% promissory note. This shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $11,600,000 CASH FLOW $2,700,000

  • IT Company with Consulting, Shared Servers, and Managed Services

    This IT and consulting business has a profit margin of 22%! Due to the convergence of two businesses, they offer technology managed services including server architecture and design, Microsoft office 360, system backups, VOIP solutions, network design, dedicated environments, platform hosting, shared servers, and 24/7 monitoring/ crisis control services. Additionally, they offer IT based staffing services which is an add on for current services. This diversity of services has afforded them the opportunity for cross advertising to their client base. This, and their excellent local reputation, has led them to a client base made up of 85% repeat customers annually. The business’s staff consists of 9 W2 employees including 2 Sales Associates, 2.5 IT Engineers, and 2 office administrators. The current owner handles general oversite and offers assistance to the team. The skilled staff would easily be able to absorb the owner’s responsibilities. This IT business has seen consistent growth in recent years and is on a path towards exponential growth. In fact, 2022 is expected to have a revenue of over $11M based on the first five months of the year!

     

    Established in 2011, this business is located in Omaha, NE. Their current service area is primarily throughout Eastern NE, but they have the potential for worldwide clients. New ownership has countless possibilities for further growth, or the chance to relax and enjoy the current organic growth path the team is on as 2022 is set to be their best year yet with an annualized cash flow of $2.2M!

     

    Priced at $8,915,000 this business with an excellent reputation for never losing a client is poised to deliver a stable and continually growing opportunity to the lucky new owners. The current owner believes in his business so much so that he is willing to roll 10% equity and offer a 15% promissory note. We believe that this shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner! In addition to this show of good faith, the owner has offered a one-year training period to ensure a smooth transition. Growth opportunities for this business could include expanding into a tech help desk service or expanding the customer base outside of Eastern Nebraska.

    PRICE $8,915,000 CASH FLOW $2,228,767

  • Site Work, Asphalt, Concrete & Paving for Government

    With a team of 20 core people in place, there is no shortage of trained professionals at hand, including office staff, project managers, and foremen.  There are also 30-50 union laborers, who are contracted as needed. This excellent team provides work for some of the largest clients in NYC, including the NYC DOT, Department of Parks & Recreation, NY & NJ Port Authorities, and the Board of Education. The proof is in the performance with this NYC business as they have never defaulted on a project in their 43 year history. This NYC-based multi-service commercial paving business has $21M in backlog to be completed by early 2023, equating to $1.68 million in profits!  This company is frequently selected for both standard and unique paving projects for multiple government organizations, resulting in repeat clientele. Their services include concrete, excavation, asphalt, and paving work.

     

    Established in 1979, the current owners are ready to retire but have a vested interested in the continuing success of this business. Any potential owner can feel confident knowing they will receive ample training on the ins-and-outs of this successful NYC paving business. While owner one is passive, he will continue his favorite part of the job- checking in on work sites in his truck for about an hour a day- for 3+ months after selling. Owner two currently works about 30 hours a week, and will provide training on administrative duties, such as approving financials and payroll, to get the new owner up to speed over the course of 2 to 3 years. Both owners started out on the project team and have worked their way up to ownership in the company, so they will be able to provide any and all pertinent knowledge of company operations. Again, their work speaks for itself, recently winning an award for their restorative work at one of NYC’s greatest parks! Their pride and eye for detail has led to a stellar reputation & allowed them to soar above competition over the years. 

     

    At a purchase price of $5,800,000, a buyer would expect to see a return of $428,621 in the first year after debt payments.  With natural growth opportunities available and a highly-trained core staff, there is no limit to what this business could do!

    PRICE $5,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,286,552

  • This New York electrical company has been in business for almost 30 years! They provide quality work at a more competitive price than its competitors. The companies experience enables it to tackle small projects with the same level of commitment given to larger projects. This company has 4 office personnel specializing in different areas such as operations, sales, and clients. The company also has 1 outsourced CFO, as well as 20 electricians staffed. They service the 5 burrows of New York City which includes the Bronx, Brooklyn, Manhattan, Queens, and Staten Island.

     

    This company offers a large variety of electrical services. These services include lighting, power, access control, fire alarms, analytics, system installation, and security systems. This business specializes in establishing BIM contracts for clients using industry-based software. Using these tools make the design and installation of electrical projects more efficient and cost effective. Current work includes working with electrical contractors and large company buildings. This company has also worked with transportation businesses specializing in rail, bus, and elevator services.

     

    With a down payment of $373,500, a buyer can expect a 95% return on investment in the first year after debt payments! This company is dedicated to providing quality and reliable electric work to its clients. Due to the fact that is company has been in business for almost 30 years, a majority of their clients are repeat or referrals. This electric company is ready to leave a new owner with an experienced crew and client base that will continue its effective work and legacy. 

    PRICE $3,735,000 CASH FLOW $933,667

  • Solar Power B2B with No Self-Performing Labor

    This business sells and coordinates installation for solar power to local industrial and commercial clients. They do not self-perform any of the labor, allowing them to maintain a profit margin over 20% year over year. The current team includes 6 core employees: 1 project manager, 1 project coordinator/client liaison, 2 business development associates, 1 sales manager, and 1 outside sales rep. Outside of this core team, they hire and coordinate subcontractors in the area for labor. Thanks to the size of this team and installation strategy, the overhead costs have been kept low by operating out of a modest 4,200 square foot office space and very minimal equipment CapEx. Their services include solar power equipment sales and coordinating installation, with the client base made up of 90% commercial and industrial clients and 10% agricultural, nonprofit organizations, and schools. They operate in Missouri, Iowa, Kansas, and Illinois. This company signs only 25% of their contracts in Q1; they currently have over $3M in signed contracts, which would have annualized revenue reaching $12M! The majority (50%) of their contracts are signed in Q4.

     

    Thanks to their skilled team, including a sales manager and sales reps, this business-to-business company has no trouble finding new clients. The recently passed US Infrastructure Bill will directly and positively impact this company. Additionally, the continued push for green energy will organically push this industry. The current owner is looking to phase out over a 1-3 year transition period and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 10% promissory note. We believe that this shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $7,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,670,114

  • Premium Playground Distributor Profiting Over $500K

    This premium playground company handles the sales, delivery, and installation of recreation equipment consisting of residential playground equipment (65% of revenue), commercial playground equipment (5% of revenue), trampolines (12% of revenue), and basketball equipment (12% of revenue). They also host on-site birthday parties and free-play time which allows for a significant amount of crossadvertising and makes up 6% of their revenue. This is held in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility which consists of 5,000 sq. ft of offices and party rooms, 10,000 sq. ft show of floor/ play space, and 5,000 sq. ft warehouse and equipment storage There are no comparable competitors in this business’s area and they are able to control the quality and timeliness of every instillation through their well-trained and experienced team. Their staff consists of 3 in store sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, 2 installers, 2 seasonal installers, and 2 subcontractors.

     

    Established in 1993, the reputation of this business is incredibly well known in the Omaha area and is overall positive, as a large portion of their customer base has approached them due to word of mouth. The current owner purchased this business in 2009 and since then has worked full-time with responsibilities consisting of payroll, marketing, accounting, general oversite, scheduling, and logistics. The current owner is looking to sell in order to spend more time with his family, and has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $1,750,000, a new owner would see a 132% return on investment in the first year of purchase! With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business, this business is primed for new ownership to step in and build the upon the growth pattern seen in recent years while benefiting from the day-to-day activities of bringing joy to children that current ownership revels in.

    PRICE $1,750,000 CASH FLOW $959,777

  • Paving/Asphalt in Sioux Falls with $7.5M in Backlog

    For over 30 years, this South Dakota asphalt paving business has it all with excellent repeat clients, a highly experienced team, and the option to grow! This company consists of 15 FT, year-round employees and hire on additional workers for projects as needed. Of these additional hires, they have 12 seasonal workers who continue to come back year after year. They also boast an extremely efficient general manager who knows the ins and outs of the operation and provides support for billing, supply ordering, A/P and A/R, reporting, and contractual agreements. The current owner is very hands on, visiting projects daily and helping out when and where they are needed. Their fleet of equipment includes trucks ($479k), oil distributors ($796k), chip spreaders ($519k), dump trucks ($437k), tractors, trailers, rollers, and tanker trucks. With their vast amount of equipment on hand, they are able to complete projects for the state, county, and municipal governments. On top of the great aspects of this business, their current work in progress exceeds $7.5M!

     

    They waste no time and often complete small projects while in the area for larger projects. Small projects can be completed in as little as one day, and they complete even their largest projects within 10 days. Billing is also done in a timely manner, with invoices going out on the day of completion of the project. On smaller, private projects, the cost is collected before the project even begins! Many of their projects come from throughout South Dakota and Nebraska, filling up their schedule by April by winning bids in each area. With enough current equipment to support an additional team, the resources are ready to go to expand the business if desired!

     

    Priced at $5,600,000, a down payment of $862,500 would return $375,196 in the first year, being over 70% collateralized! This South Dakota asphalt paving business is ready for their next step and is an excellent opportunity for any new owner, as the current responsibilities of the owner consist of only project oversight!

    PRICE $5,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,202,882

  • Warehousing, Corporate Relocation & Moving – Absentee Owned

     

    The highly qualified staff of moving coordinators, movers,  packers, and drivers are considered experts in the industry, with nearly 300 employees at this warehousing, corporate relocation, and moving company.  The organizational chart is exceptionally well-developed, with a full senior and mid-level management team in place, allowing the seller to step back to an absentee position, spending less than 10 hours on the business per month!  This qualified team also includes drivers, movers, marketing, sales, call center, and IT members, who are all considered experts in the industry.  With 11 locations in the Pacific Northwest, this company has been able to easily fulfill their clients’ needs since their inception in 2013.  Their client base is diverse, and sees an incredible 65% repeat and referral base, with a focus in military, residential, business, and corporate moving and storage.  Services include warehousing & distribution, military contracts, office & business moving, residential moving, storage, and packing & crating.  With the purchase of this opportunity, a buyer would receive over $10M in assets, proving this to be a truly turn-key operation.

     

    Of the 11 current locations, 3 of the spaces are leased, while the other 8 are owned by the company.  There would be an option to continue leasing all locations, to be negotiated between the buyer and seller.  The owner is absentee and lives out of state, after having spent the last few years slowly transitioning out of the business.  Currently, he spends about 10 hours/month on the business, only participating in two monthly team meetings to get updates from his staff.  Why sell if he is truly absentee?  The goal at hand is for the current owner to be able to move into other interests, as he owns commercial property and is looking to deploy more capital on those ventures. 

     

    The business has recently started exploring the mobile storage/pods, allowing them to provide further services to different types of clients and continue the overall growth.  Other growth opportunities include further small, inexpensive acquisitions to expand the territory and adding server farm moving and hauling.  At a purchase price of $22,500,000, and with the assets on hand, a buyer’s contribution would be 60% collateralized by the business assets alone!  There is an option for the seller to not only provide a 10% seller carry, but to also retain 10% in equity if desired.  On top of that, he will stay on board for 6 months-1 year to ensure a smooth transition.  This is being done to show the vested interest in the ongoing success of the business post-close.  

    PRICE $23,000,000 CASH FLOW $3,911,487

  • Staffing Firm with Niche in CPA & HR Placement

    This professional staffing & recruiting firm, based in Kansas, generates 80% of its revenue from recurring clients! This firm has been established for more than 35 years, and has more than 130 clients with strong long-term client relationships. Focusing on the fields of HR and accounting, the firm provides both skilled executives such as CFOs or HR directors (60% of revenue) and temporary staff (40% of revenue). They have over 180 in-progress jobs, representing more than $2,000,000 in total incoming revenue! An additional $1,000,000 of revenue is represented by jobs in negotiation. With an increasing trend of remote work and a demand for skilled professionals after 2021, there has never been a better time to transition into the staffing industry, which is on pace to set new records in 2022.

     This is a family business that has been around since 1985, with the current, second-generation owner taking over back in 2012. They have plenty of room to grow and add more team members at the current location, without having to find a larger space.

     The owner is willing to sell the business outright, or partner with a new investor to help grow the business over the next several years. He currently assists with recruiting, though there are other team members who can do this, along with managing the sales team.  Possible growth opportunities include hiring additional recruiters, expanding the company’s activity in the HR field, and branching out into other skilled fields like legal or engineering.

     With a solid reputation, and being established over 35 years, this company is well-suited for the next owner to step in and continue the legacy without a hitch!

    PRICE $6,950,000 CASH FLOW $1,450,625

  • Pet Nutrition Manufacturer, Competent Staff and High Reputation

    This business manufacturers custom pet supplements for clients who then private label the product and sell it under their name on ecommerce sites such as Amazon. The clients do not own the formulations, they only private label. This business is stable, with the current owner willing to carry 20% of the financing as a show of faith, and also is willing to consult long-term with the new owner. The extremely capable team gives a new owner the flexibility to move to absentee ownership, or alternatively to focus on growth.

     

    The business sells custom-order to 20+ clients, who then sell the product through ecommerce sites. Product categories include pet treat supplements, dog probiotics and dental sticks, and powder supplements. The close-knit six-person staff is extremely competent, with the number one employee capable of managing all day-to-day operations. The owner currently mostly offers high-level direction and works 20 hours a week. A new owner has the freedom to become more or less involved than this as they please.

     

    If the new owner chooses to invest into growth, several promising routes are available. Currently this business does absolutely no sales, so bringing on a salesperson is one option. Launching the company’s own brand is another exciting avenue, as well as expanding into other product and animal categories.

     

    This business comes with $950,000 of tangible assets including pet nutrition product mixers and a new dog dental product machine.

     

    Priced at $2,935,000, a 15% down payment of $440,250 returns $407,034 in the first year after debt payments! 

    PRICE $2,935,000 CASH FLOW $839,202

  • Commercial Roofing in PA – 90 Employees

    With over $14.3M in sales in 2020, this commercial roofing company has 90 W2 employees in place! Established for over 20 years and with 100% commercial clients, their focus is on larger industrial and institutional projects; project size ranges from $75k to $3.75M. Offering reroofing (50% of their revenue) new construction (40%) and repair & maintenance (10%) within a 75-mile radius of Pittsburgh, this team of 90 employees is comprised of 75 craftsmen and sheet metal workers, along with 15 salaried support staff. The company subs out only as needed based on project size and ancillary services in the contract. Their clientele is a diverse assortment of consultants, general contractors, and private owners; this business is highly sought after in the greater Pittsburgh region.  Revenue reached over $14.3M in 2020, and 2021 is looking highly profitable, with over $16M already in their backlog. With over $9M in assets, the bank loan is over 70% collateralized.

     

    The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-to-month basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The  non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction.

     

    Priced at $12,250,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Pursuing more maintenance work and roofing-related sheet metal projects would certainly increase revenue. With already long-standing client relationships in place, organic growth is inevitable if services are expanded.

    PRICE $12,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,614,063

  • Passive Des Moines Home Renovation Company

     

    This passive Des Moines based home renovation company is stable and has huge growth potential! Boasting an amazing reputation which leads to repeat clients and referrals, this company has more than $1,600,000 in the pipeline for Q1 alone, which annualizes out to $6.4M in projected revenue! There is nearly $1M in assets including the company’s 14 vans, power tools, and inventory. This well-built operation is passive – with the owner dedicating only 5 to 7 hours a week to the business - but also boasts room to grow if an ambitious new owner wants to lean into growth opportunities. A well-executed hiring campaign to increase the volume of work, as well as possibly opening a satellite location, could drive this business even higher. 

     

    This experienced team provides a “one-stop-shop” approach to residential kitchen and bath remodels. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every installation by completing all work in house except for countertop instillation. Their complete showroom and an onsite designer provide 3D renderings for projects that allows for stress-free selections. Most projects happen in the kitchen (45%), the bathroom (45%), as well as other remodeling projects throughout the home. A 12% down payment of $677,829 returns $718,052 in the first year even after debt payments!

     

    An incredible asset of this business is the well-trained and experienced team who are cross-trained in many different skills and many of whom have a long tenure with the company. Leads manage the projects, and the general manager handles the day-to-day operations with the help of an office manager. The team works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. office building. The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and is willing to lease to the next owner. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has a long-standing relationship with customers; they are able to keep their service area within a 30-mile radius of the Des Moines metro.

    PRICE $5,648,580 CASH FLOW $1,569,050

  • Civil Firm Focused on Roads & Excavation with $33M in Backlog

    With over $13M worth of assets included in the purchase of the business, the current owner could actually collect more income by selling his equipment than he will be with the purchase of this business. He is choosing to sell his business because continuing to employ his staff and allowing someone to build on the business’s current legacy is more valuable to him than the A/R that his equipment could gather. Thanks to these assets, the purchase of this business is over 55% collateralized. This business is at the top of their field. They are specialists in excavation and utility installation for road projects and large site retail and industrial jobs in their service area of primarily Virginia along with Kentucky and West Virginia. They boast 50% repeat customers. Their client base is made up of 36% municipalities, 22% government, 23% schools, and 19% commercial property owners. Their staff is able to handle a wide variety of clients both in geographic location and in contract types thanks to their size and skill. The team has over 120 members including 3 SVP’s, 8 superintendents, 1 office manager, 1 administrator/billing, and +/- 110 laborers dependent on projects and locations. It is pertinent to note that all staff have signed an agreement to stay on through completion of their current projects, so long as they remain at the same salary and bonus structure.

     

    The current owner performs general oversight as a preference, as he is in his mid-80’s. His passion for the job is clearly contagious, as he has multiple personnel that have been employed for 10+ years, but he’s decided it’s time to retire. Established over 50 years ago, the longevity of this business has resulted in an excellent reputation for high-quality work, completed on time, every time. This long-standing esteem coupled with $33M of work in progress and new bids in the pipeline is manifesting in a projected revenue of $28M for 2022.

     

    Priced to sell at $22,500,000, this excavation company has it all with repeat clientele, profitable contracts, and excellent name recognition. Not to mention the far over-collateralization of purchase with the $13M in included assets. The services this business offers are deemed essential and the industry as a whole is pandemic proof. In addition to this stability, new ownership is also poised to benefit from the increase in business and revenue brought on by the 2021 infrastructure bill which is providing natural growth in the construction industry. As an added layer of faith in the business, not only is the current owner prepared to collect less income from the sale of the business rather than the sale of equipment to keep the business running and the employees working, he is also offering to finance or equity roll 15% of the purchase! We believe that this shows extremely good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the next owner. There has never been a better time to get into the construction business and, given all of the positive points listed above, this excavation company is ready to capitalize on these incredible opportunities!

    PRICE $22,500,000 CASH FLOW $7,484,031

  • Branding and Marketing Firm with 26% Profit Margin

    This multi-faceted branding, advertising, and marketing firm has a fully trained core staff and the ability to adapt to any market ebb and flow thanks to consultants and freelance workers being contracted as needed. The core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies. With a 29% profit margin, it’s fair to say that their work experience and dedication to the field is paying off. This agency provides all of the marketing services that a company could need including brand strategy, campaign development and implementation, web development, content marketing in television, print, digital, and social media, media planning and buying, and account-based marketing. With over $1.9M in assets and over $8M in annual revenue for the past 3 consecutive years, the possibilities that new owners have with this business are seemingly endless.

     

    Primarily working with financial/retirement services, insurance, technology and healthcare categories, this agency is involved in industries that are playing an important role right now and using this opportunity to catch up in the digital space. The core team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy, and client service staff. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With current assets and staff, low-cost growth opportunities include continuing to build client relationships with blue chip clients, and expanding outside of the current clientele focus. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 5% plus an equity roll of 10%.

     

    Priced at $11,500,000, this company is prime for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

    PRICE $11,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,206,622

  • Combined Listing – Firearm Sales & Services + Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue

     

    Something you don’t see every day – one owner selling two businesses!  For the price of $5.19M, you would be getting both a Firearm Sales & Services AND Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue!  By purchasing the two together, a buyer would be saving $200K Both businesses are located in the same strip center in Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, bringing in regular foot traffic and destination shoppers alike.

     

    At the firearms store, there are 5 FT employees and 1 PT.  The owner’s son is the managing member, and he is willing to stay on full time for the next owner.  That salary is accounted for in our cash flow.  The restaurant has 50 employees on staff, including a full management team for front of house and back of house.  The owner is willing to train and transition for 3-6 months at both businesses, as needed for the buyer.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still presently utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, filling roles and positions as needed during peak hours. With minimal online marketing, a significant growth opportunity exists for a new owner, with a current owner training period dependent on the experience and needs of the buyer.

     

    Customers of all types frequent the store – avid gun collectors, hunters, recreational shooters, people looking for a home protection firearm, local law enforcement agencies, first responders, and military personnel can find something to fit their needs. The revenue is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms vs. accessories. They also do firearm trade-ins, basic gunsmithing, scope installation, night sight installation, and total tear-down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks. They sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers.

     

    This combined listing is a unique opportunity to get into two very different industries at the same time!

    PRICE $5,190,000 CASH FLOW $1,373,804

  • Thriving Upscale Restaurant with Passive Ownership

    With over $5M in revenue and a profit margin far above the industry average this upscale restaurant in Pennsylvania is thriving! An established staff and management system has allowed the current owner to take on a passive role in business. 50 staff members offer a varied menu including elevated and delicious classics like Italian pasta, prime rib, salmon, fried calamari, seared scallops, and mussels that keep clientele coming back again and again. Luckily, the business has plenty of space to host the citizens of Harrisburg and surrounding areas. With 5,000 square feet and the capacity to host 100 customers indoors and additional covered booth seating available outside, there’s plenty of room for everyone. This restaurant also boasts an exclusive liquor license valued at $500K as Cumberland County has limited business allowance. Established staff, high profile and varied menu, and a closed market liquor license are just a few of the factors that set this business apart from competition.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still readily available and utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, but this is a preference and could be easily phased out as they have two full time managers. With an established website but minimal online marketing, a significant and cost-efficient growth opportunity exists for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $2,590,000, the restaurant is primed to continue its current growth pattern far beyond 2020 with 2021 annualized gross sales over $5M! A 15% down payment of $388,500 returns $457,123 in the first year after debt payments – a 118% return on investment!

     

     

    PRICE $2,590,000 CASH FLOW $785,573

  • Full-Service Firearms Retailer with $1.2M in Guaranteed Inventory

    This full-service firearms retailer guarantees $1.2M in inventory which collateralizes 42% of the bank loan! The well-established business has been in operation since 2014 and provides a seamless approach through the purchasing process. With years of expertise in the firearms industry, this company is boasting a 20% profit margin. An incredible asset of the business is the well-trained and experienced team whom all have a long tenure within the company. The general manager in place fully handles business operations allowing the business to be passively owned. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every purchase by offering a vast number of services including gun trading, gunsmithing and cleaning, scope installation, total tear down and reassembly, and function checks. In addition to these inventory availabilities, the store has a wide variety of available products to meet these demands including new and used firearms, ammunition, and firearm accessories.  Their diverse outreach of customers includes local law enforcement agencies, first responders, military personnel, hunters, recreational shooters, people wanting to protect their home. With the aforementioned inventory and services, an outstanding reputation built on customer services, and their established and knowledgeable staff this business is primed for a new owner to step in and enjoy the spoils of an annual cash flow over $1M.

     

    The revenue, both online and in store, is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms and accessories. With an established customer base they sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers. They work out of a 3,000 sq. ft. space and the current rent is $2,600/month, with 4 years left on the lease. They have 700 firearms in stock, valued at $1.2M which offers a bank loan that would be 60% collateralized.

     

    Priced at $3,800,000, this business is in a prime geographic location, has a solid online sales representation, has a solid reputation and client base already in place, and is poised for continued growth. A new owner could offer more online products by working with more distributors; the company currently works with three distributors but has memberships with 12. Opening the store on Sundays would also lead to a boost in sales.

    PRICE $3,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,029,895

  • Nurse Staffing Agency in Texas with 32% Profit Margin

    Due to the supply and demand of nurses, this staffing agency has a steady flow of clients each week and has seen year-over-year growth in sales and consistently high profit margins! Established in West Central Texas for over 20 years, the company provides Registered Nurses, Licensed Vocational Nurses, Certified Nursing Assistants, and Certified Medication Aids for hospitals, clinics, nursing homes, government, state, and schools on an as-needed, short-term, or long-term basis. Partnering with some of the leading healthcare facilities in the state of Texas, each nurse recruited by the agency is sent to the client as a W2 employee, which sets them apart from other staffing agencies. They average 65-75 active employees (RN’s, LVN’s, CNA’s, and CMA’s) who are in the system and ready to work when needed. As facilities are constantly faced with last minute and temporary staffing needs due to vacations, staffing shortages, and open shifts as a result of scheduled and unscheduled absences, this agency has a steady flow of clients each week.

     

    Office staff includes 1 Office Manager/HR and 1 Staff Coordinator, and all nurses in their database are employed by the agency. All applicants are thoroughly screened before being submitted to a facility’s HR department. Base hourly rates for the nurses range from $18-$25/hour for CNA’s, $30-$37/hour for LVN’s, and $40-$47/hour for RN’s, with rates going higher if the nurse is working in a specialty unit or Covid unit. The number of clients/positions filled varies by the week, depending on demand; in general, the agency distributes 35-45 paychecks each week to the nurses.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this agency already has a solid reputation and a well-established client base. A new owner could easily boost revenue by implementing a marketing strategy, creating a social media presence, and updating the company website. This would be a great opportunity and highly beneficial for an existing staffing agency to purchase.

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,911,740

  • Dropship Supplier with Established Client Base

    With a well-established client base, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States! This business has over 75 repeat clients and relationships with over 20 vendors, this dropship company sold over $5M in 2021 and are on track to grow! In addition, they are in the goal to exceed $10M in sales this year with a 12% year over year growth in the slow season. They sell a wide variety of products, including office, janitorial, restaurant, and industrial supplies, as well as furniture and technology accessories. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and have an extremely efficient team of 5 contracted employees. They are currently fulfilling around 4,000 orders each month, with an increase in Q4 each year to accommodate holiday sales. If you’re looking to jump into the e-commerce space, you won’t want to miss this opportunity!

     

    They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.  75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.

     

    This company priced at $3,250,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,250,000 CASH FLOW $837,785

  • Earthwork, Shoreline Protection, Site Prep in Texas – 90+ FT Employees

    This Earthwork & Industrial Site Prep business completes 225 jobs per year, with a minimum of 20 active projects at one time!  Located in Victoria, Texas and with 90+ FT employees, their average client tenure is 13 years. Sale size ranges from $10k to $1.5M, with an average of $350k. With $9.4M in WIP and over $3M in their pipeline, work is plentiful for this well-diversified team. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 30% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 70% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own 90+ person team completing the work, which boosts profit margin.

     

    Over $7M in assets includes $5M in heavy equipment, $1.2M in vehicles, $57k worth of trailers, tools valued at $365k, and office furniture & software worth $379k. The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month; this rate would be kept the same under new ownership. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years where they have a 75% win rate; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 25% success rate on those. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area to other gulf states for high margin erosion control projects and actively pursuing more bids would certainly lead to an increase in revenue. There is currently a very limited sales team and little to no marketing. Working Capital is $2.1M and would transfer to the new owner.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,154,501

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Fire Protection Engineering Firm in Texas – 60% Profit Margin

    The current Senior Consultant for this fire protection engineering firm has over 20 years of experience and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership! With a 60% profit margin and year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations.  Established for over 25 years, this firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $5,900,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $5,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing with 70+ Employees

    This commercial roofing & sheet metal company has seen year-over-year growth in sales, with over $13.5M in 2020! They have a diverse client base that includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. With  70 employees in place, the company has considerable repeat business with GC’s, Construction Managers, and Owners. Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. Their expertise includes membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,650,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,650,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • B2B Refrigeration, AC & Maintenance

    This established HVAC company located on Maui is known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company because of their excellent customer service and prompt quality repairs. Established in 1997, they have an excellent team of 16 employees, including trusted technicians, office staff, and installation managers. They split their time between service and installation, with 75% repeat clients on the service end and 50% repeat clients for installation. All of this work equates to an average monthly revenue of $400,000. Due to the excellent reputation and efficient team, the owner of this successful HVAC company enjoys 3-4 months out of state each year! Their reputation exceeds expectations due to the services offered: Commercial Refrigeration Repair & Installation, AC Repair & Installation, Maintenance (90% Commercial). Of those services, 50% is service, and 50% is installation.

     

    The owner has built a solid customer base and provides services to commercial clients like condos, shopping malls, retail stores some of which have relationships with this company spanning 20+ years. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop. The owner currently focuses on general financial and business oversight as well as the bidding process.

     

    Priced at $2,800,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does no marketing; the only advertising they do is from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service they provide. Implementing a marketing strategy would certainly boost sales. A 12.5% down payment of $350,000 returns $412,665 in the first year after debt payments – a 118% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,800,000 CASH FLOW $770,737

  • Nationwide Multi-Year Government Contracts for Full-Service Marketing & PR

    Established 1996 and with multi-year sub-contracts ranging from $60-$420K per year for three to five years, this award winning full-service public relations and marketing firm has been serving their clients statewide, nationally and internationally for 20+ years.  Average value of prime contracts is $1M for 5-6 years and majority of their clients are recurring with 10+ year average tenure. They have a total of 12 clients, with multiple being contracts with state and federal agencies. One of their main clients with 6 multi-year contracts is recognized nationwide and internationally for its leadership and innovation and in many ways is ten years ahead of other states because this company has more experience in next generation intelligent transportation systems than any other communications and training firms in the country. From their Southeast US 5,500 square feet office with $300K worth of assets that includes digital production equipment, the firm provides public relations, digital marketing & advertising, knowledge transfer, research & strategic services all under one roof. With a 25% profit margin, they primarily serve government agencies, but also have clients in construction, automotive, and emerging technologies. In addition, they have a robust marketing process that has culminated in 8000+ industry leaders and decisionmakers who receive company e-newsletters on a regular basis.

    The firm’s reputation is so strong in the transportation industry it is consistently sought out as a teaming partner by an impressive list of engineering, intelligent transportation, and planning firms Like HDR, Atkins and Booz & Allen. They win large, impressive contracts competing against strong incumbents due to their proprietary processes and scalable platforms for RFP responses, as well as strong business relationships.

    They have a team of 31 highly skilled fulltime employees that include a creative director who has won numerous awards for the branding, websites and marketing collateral he has developed for this company’s clients. In general, many employees have 10+ year tenure with the company and have professional backgrounds in journalism.

    With the results of the presidential election, the public relations industry is convinced that an infrastructure bill is imminent and this company is positioned to ride this wave of opportunity and grow because they have been leading outreach efforts for next generation intelligent transportation systems and connected vehicles for 15 years. In addition, they have more experience in these future focused specialties than any other communications and training firm in the nation.

    PRICE $4,200,000 CASH FLOW $990,945

  • Rental Business with 36% Profit Margin

     

    This rental company boasts a profit margin of 36% and nearly $15M in assets! Services include hauling, installation, dismantlement, rental, and sale of frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms. On average, 60% of revenue comes from rentals. They are highly diversified, with 15 customers making up 70% of their revenue and 95% of their clients recurring, with 95% continually recurring; including general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair & installation contractors, there is no shortage of projects! The company is currently operating at a 36% profit margin, which is very strong. They are able to offer a wide range of services thanks to the 60+ skilled employees on staff, including 7 office staff, 3 mechanics, 3 field managers, 4 drivers, and 25-40 laborers.

     

    Boasting $4M in hydro mobile inventory (95+ units), they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 3-5 units. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market. In addition, the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill directly caters to this company’s core customer base and will certainly increase their revenue in the coming years.  The current workload consists of 45% restoration and 55% new construction. This company does little to no marketing or advertising due to their recurring clients or person.  A new owner could absolutely grow by simply adding a marketing and sales plan.

     

    Priced at $18,750,000, this business is 80% collateralized with the assets included in the sale!  It is positioned to grow in the contracting space by accepting more invitations, moving into neighboring cities, and expanding types of fleet, such as forklifts & drilling bores.  

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $5,304,421

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Toronto Multi-Service Engineering Firm – 31% Profit Margin

    With over $4.6M in sales and a 31% profit margin in 2020, this Toronto-based engineering consulting firm has seen steady growth over the years. With solid long-term relationships established with their clients throughout Canada, they offer a variety of services including geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, noise & vibration monitoring, geotechnical engineering & material testing, building design, environmental engineering, civil engineering design & planning, hydrogeological engineering, Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) scanning services, noise impact studying, and construction dust monitoring.  Taking on large, long-term projects for transit authorities, governmental organizations, and general contractors, this company has wide-ranging capabilities creating a consolidated resource for customers to meet their project goals. A focus of the company is on transit systems including tunneling, subway, rail and subway stations, bridges, sewer and water infrastructure, and highways. Their 50 personnel includes professional engineers, architects, subject matter experts, software engineers, surveyors, accounting, and administration.

    The owner of this business currently oversees operations and is a reliable and very knowledgeable resource for employees. The owner manages the strong growth trajectory and supports positive client relationships.  To continue revenue growth, one could consider offering commissions to the sales team to boost external relationships networking and earning additional contracts.  

    Operations are managed from the 10,000 square foot headquarters located in the Greater Toronto Area. The company has over 15 years of experience serving Canada, and has expanded its business to Trinidad, Tobago, Turkey, China, and the United States.

    PRICE $8,400,000 CASH FLOW $1,420,321

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Wireless Tech Company with $9M Top Line Potential

    This business with a 29% profit margin has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $8,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • Environmental Services for Commercial Clientele

    Passive ownership with 37 skilled employees in Washington! Located in the Seattle, Washington area, these specialists in the environmental industry have earned a 25% profit margin in 2018 and continue to experience year-over-year growth.  Asbestos removal (40%), interior demolition (40%), as well as mold and lead remediation (20%) are the main services offered by this company.  Commercial clients account for 80% of annual contract revenues, with residential projects producing 20%.  Clients include The Federal Government, Washington State Universities and schools, local municipalities, and health care facilities.  Day-to-day operations are led by a tenured vice president with management oversight of two administrative assistants, three estimators with project management experience, three operations managers, seven supervisors and the workforce.  The owner currently leads in a consultant capacity mentoring and developing leadership staff while also ensuring bonding and insurance.

     

    With a total of 9,300 square feet of space, the headquarters has ample room to further expand operations.  The office is 2,800 square feet and features five private offices, a reception area, a large conference room used for meetings, training, and environmental records storage.   The warehouse and shop span 6,500 square feet of indoor space allowing for staging, tool and inventory storage, and warehouse management.  An expansive paved lot and gravel yard of two acres house all heavy equipment, vehicles, disposal containers, and trailers.  Assets comprise all equipment necessary for safe testing, handling, and removal of hazardous materials.

     

    Strong revenue generating initiatives could be achieved by increasing the workforce to take on contracts currently sacrificed, driving growth of the container rental business, and utilizing targeted advertising to generate new contacts.

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,112,023

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • International PR and Event Firm with Passive Ownership

    This international company has been around since 1995, and in that time has been able to establish a diversified clientele base made up of only 30% local and regional clients and 70% international clients! This has been possible thanks to their 64 experienced staff members including 5 management board members and 33FT and 26PT workers operating in graphic design, client relations, media analysis, web services, social media, administration, editing, and outreach. With this excellent chain of command, the owner has been able to transition to a completely passive ownership with no billable hours. This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency currently has a profit margin of 29%. The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management. 

     

    The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well. Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of 64. This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease. 

     

    At a purchase price of $1,500,000 and a down payment of $300,000, a buyer would see a return of $308,766 in the first year after debt payments! This business is established and ready for a new owner to step in!

    PRICE $1,500,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

  • Roofing with Storm Restoration – Pandemic & Recession Proof

    This roofing company with storm restoration services boasted over $1.4M in cash flow in 2021 and has 16 employees in place between two locations on the East Coast, including 2 office managers, 5 office staff, and 7 sales reps.  This full team allows the current owner to focus strictly on the oversight of the sales division.  Even still, he is willing to stay on board for 2-3 years post-close to ensure a smooth transition.  All of the labor is outsourced, allowing this company to see a lower CapEx and liability.  They service largely residential clients (95%) within a 2-hour radius from each location (Virginia, West Virginia, and Maryland).  Services include roof inspections & installation, gutter repair, siding, windows, windows, floors, decks, etc., depending on the customer needs. 

     

    In the Northeast U.S., April through September is storm season, which is the busiest time of year for this company. After a hail storm, there is a 50% chance that a roof will have a leak. After being in business for 20+ years, they have learned to utilize this information by increasing their cold call and door to door sales to coincide with this optimum business opportunity. Because of this niche market, the business has proven to be pandemic and recession proof.  Their team works with clients’ insurance companies to ensure that customers get the most of their claim. Coupled with their high levels of customers coming in due to referrals (70%!), their client list of over 5,000 people, and their average online rating of 4.8, this business is primed for growth.  Outside of their already incredible client base, there would be easy expansion into commercial and government work as well.

     

    The current owner is willing to carry up to 20% of the $2.85M purchase price, which shows confidence in the company’s ability to continue successfully.  Based on a 2020-2021 average cash flow, a down payment of $427,500 would return $481,751 in the first year after debt payments!  Also included with this purchase is the 10 vehicles needed for the sales team, allowing a new owner to step in and hit the ground running from day one.

    PRICE $2,850,000 CASH FLOW $1,406,331

  • $18M in Backlog: Commercial Roofing w/60% Repeat Clients

     

    This 100% commercial roofing company has $18M in backlog (committed contracts), with 60% repeat clients!  With a prime location in Akron, Ohio, they provide maintenance & repair work (60%) and new builds (40%) for their clients within a120-mile radius.  The large, well-established and trained team of 25 admin staff and 60 metal workers & craftsmen self-performs all of the work from start to finish.  Included with the sale of the business is over $6M in assets, including $3.65M in vehicles & equipment and $40K+ in inventory. 

     

    This area is well known for their requirements of union-based employees and businesses for construction or repair work. Thankfully, this business is well intertwined with local unions, and 75% of their current projects come from those established partnerships. While they do some public work with these ties, expanding their partnerships and open bids to include more municipal work would be a huge opportunity for growth. Other opportunities would include expanding into residential work or growing the new installation side of business as their current primary focus is maintenance and repair.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000 a 10% down payment of $1,650,000 returns $1,509,744 in the first year after debt payments. The current owner is selling as part of his retirement strategy.  Though he is active in oversight and management, he is willing to stay on for 2 years post-close to not only train & transition, but to help find and train his replacement.  This established business comes with a loyal client base, an experienced team of industry experts, and a reputation that keeps word of mouth marketing effective all year round! New ownership can expect to continue this business’s recent growth streak without investing excessive resources into expanding opportunities.

     

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,712,096

  • K-12 Architecture Firm with Nationwide Clients: 25+ Expert Employees

    This firm specializes in the planning and for nationwide clients, specifically in the K-12, university, multi-family housing and hospitals. This extremely skilled staff of 28 full-time employees split between their two offices, consists of several architects, interior designers, and administrators. The team has a reputation of excellent customer service that has been established since this firm’s opening 16 years ago. Thanks to their locations in Oklahoma City, OK and Dallas, TX this firm is set to do exceptionally well in 2022 with their current financial information annualizing to show over $6.1M in revenue for 2022. In addition to the reputation, staff, and broad client base, this business also comes with $3,800,000 of backlog to allow new ownership to continue business operations and growth. As a demonstration of faith in the business, 10% seller financing and 15% equity roll is being offered. The current ownership is looking to retire, and they have offered a training/transition period of 2-3 years to ensure a smooth change of ownership.

     

    The owner primarily handles overall management, he has no reason to believe that a change of ownership would lead to a loss of clients or employees. This is especially true with the previously mentioned lengthy transition period offered. His salary has been accounted for in our cash flow analysis and the above listed cash flow. In addition to the excellent growth, the business comes with over $1.1M worth of assets. Not only do these assets afford new ownership the opportunity to ride the current growth pattern, they also offer an additional route of growth with no additional staff or purchases needed. New ownership could easily add hospital architecture to their niche portfolio for new growth.

     

    This business has been priced at $4,350,000 due to the recent cash flow, long-standing client base, 16 years of service and reputation, multiple locations, wide geographic range of client base, over $1.1M in assets included, 28 skilled employees, and the outstanding offered training period from new ownership. All of these amenities included leads new ownership to the ability to continue business as is and grow with expanded services at no foreseen additional costs.

    PRICE $4,350,000 CASH FLOW $1,201,592

Logistics/Distribution/Procurement (8)

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Specialty Equipment Fleet: Rental and Maintenance with Two Locations

    This specialty equipment business currently has $4M in backlog; applying the average 19% profit margin, this business could see profits over $3M in 2022! Their services are rental, sales, repair, and maintenance of niche equipment, including foundation & directional drilling equipment, cranes, and rotators. With a primary location in Phoenix, Arizona and a second location in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to service the Southwestern sector of the United States. Their clients consist of general & specialized contractors, foundation companies, electrical companies, waste management, infrastructure firms, and private owners of large equipment. Included with the purchase of this business is over $7.9M in equipment and inventory, making the business 68% collateralized. The team includes a CFO, Project and Operating Consultant, Mechanic, 2 Sales Representatives, 1 Accountant, and 1 Yard Manager.  The owner oversees sales for only 15-20 hours a week, which the COO is being mentored to absorb.

     

    Established over 15 years ago, this well-known business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. Other growth opportunities include increasing rental inventory and expanding their reach into Texas. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright.

     

    Priced at $11,600,000 this business has the potential to return $1,111,409 in 2022 based on the 2020+2022 average cash flow. The current owner believes in the businesses onward & upward revenues and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 15% promissory note. This shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $11,600,000 CASH FLOW $2,700,000

  • Popular Men’s Clothing Manufacturer With 3 other Clothing Labels as Subsidiaries

     

    This well established and stylish men’s clothing label and apparel manufacturer serves the US, Canada, and much of Europe supplying men’s apparel to a variety of retail stores. The current owner works remotely, and his responsibilities include general oversight of the company and approving product designs, neither of which require much time in person, meaning that this would be the perfect opportunity for someone looking for a company that would run itself with little oversight from that owner. The parent company has 3 subsidiaries also producing men’s apparel, to ensure the highest quality for each of the four labels, the company practices offshoring their manufacturing to 3 different factories located in, India, China, and Pakistan each of which can ship products directly to customers. Though each of these labels is solely focused on men’s clothing, there is ample opportunity for growth moving into the women’s and children’s clothing sectors. The current owner is willing to stay on for 6 months to a year to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Specializing in creating t-shirts, shorts, hoodies, long sleeves, and button-ups, the company has a well-established online shop where consumers can buy products. This online shop ships products to 8 different countries, including Germany and France. They own 3 other clothing brands under their leading brand, equally 4 altogether; to appeal to all markets. This company also collaborates with up-and-coming musical artists to offer exposure for not only the artist but also for the company. There are currently 20+ ambassadors who proudly display their clothing at concerts, musical festivals, and other public events. As far as industry uniqueness goes, they focus on keeping products “complex but simple” and staying ahead of the market.

     

    With a price of $2,200,000, and a 12.5% down payment of $275,000, a buyer can expect a return of $431,489 in the first year after debt payments! This is not an opportunity to miss out on! This business continues to preserve essential clients as well as providing excellent products! The company is ready for a new owner to take over the legacy!

     

    PRICE $2,200,000 CASH FLOW $712,832

  • Barcode Solutions and Integration: 50% Collateralized

    With over $420,000 in assets included in purchase, this barcode solutions and integration business opportunity is over 50% collateralized. In addition to the hard assets offered with the business, this company has over 1,800 active customers in their client base made up of 55% resellers and 45% end-users! With services including barcode system integration, equipment maintenance, fulfillment, troubleshooting, and solutions, this business is able to operate nationwide and has some international customers as well. The bulk of their sales (65%) consists of media/consumables (labels, thermal transfer ribbons, thermal tags, warehouse signs); they also sell software (asset tracking, barcode label printing, inventory control/WMS software), and hardware (barcode scanners, label printers, receipt printers, etc.). The current staff is made up of 5 employees including 1 office and marketing manager, 1 east coast manager (based in Georgia), 1 part-time employee, 1 1099 sales representative (based in Chicago), and one owner who handles general oversite and some accounting and order processing. This owner has offered a training/ transition period of 3-5 years and their salary for this time period has been accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    The company currently places their orders with nearly 240 vendors and keeps approximately $103K worth of inventory on hand at any given time. They pack and ship customer-specific orders daily and distribute the shipments locally as well as nationwide using United Parcel Service and LTL freight companies. This small but efficient team produced nearly $2M in sales in 2020 and is on track to make $2.4M in 2022. A new owner has the opportunity to expand into new industries or continue to run this successful business as-is.

     

    Priced at $815,000, a new owner is expected to see a 233% return on investment in the first year after debt payments based on the 2022 annualized cash flow and the loan needed for this purchase will be over 50% collateralized. Growth is unlimited, as there are untapped markets across the country. Small businesses all the way up to large retail chains need these services to keep up with ever-evolving technology while maintaining profitability and keeping costs low.

    PRICE $815,000 CASH FLOW $368,815

  • Dropship Supplier with Established Client Base

    With a well-established client base, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States! This business has over 75 repeat clients and relationships with over 20 vendors, this dropship company sold over $5M in 2021 and are on track to grow! In addition, they are in the goal to exceed $10M in sales this year with a 12% year over year growth in the slow season. They sell a wide variety of products, including office, janitorial, restaurant, and industrial supplies, as well as furniture and technology accessories. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and have an extremely efficient team of 5 contracted employees. They are currently fulfilling around 4,000 orders each month, with an increase in Q4 each year to accommodate holiday sales. If you’re looking to jump into the e-commerce space, you won’t want to miss this opportunity!

     

    They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.  75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.

     

    This company priced at $3,250,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,250,000 CASH FLOW $837,785

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Rental Business with 36% Profit Margin

     

    This rental company boasts a profit margin of 36% and nearly $15M in assets! Services include hauling, installation, dismantlement, rental, and sale of frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms. On average, 60% of revenue comes from rentals. They are highly diversified, with 15 customers making up 70% of their revenue and 95% of their clients recurring, with 95% continually recurring; including general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair & installation contractors, there is no shortage of projects! The company is currently operating at a 36% profit margin, which is very strong. They are able to offer a wide range of services thanks to the 60+ skilled employees on staff, including 7 office staff, 3 mechanics, 3 field managers, 4 drivers, and 25-40 laborers.

     

    Boasting $4M in hydro mobile inventory (95+ units), they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 3-5 units. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market. In addition, the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill directly caters to this company’s core customer base and will certainly increase their revenue in the coming years.  The current workload consists of 45% restoration and 55% new construction. This company does little to no marketing or advertising due to their recurring clients or person.  A new owner could absolutely grow by simply adding a marketing and sales plan.

     

    Priced at $18,750,000, this business is 80% collateralized with the assets included in the sale!  It is positioned to grow in the contracting space by accepting more invitations, moving into neighboring cities, and expanding types of fleet, such as forklifts & drilling bores.  

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $5,304,421

Hospitality/Events/Restaurants (7)

  • Thriving Upscale Restaurant with Passive Ownership

    With over $5M in revenue and a profit margin far above the industry average this upscale restaurant in Pennsylvania is thriving! An established staff and management system has allowed the current owner to take on a passive role in business. 50 staff members offer a varied menu including elevated and delicious classics like Italian pasta, prime rib, salmon, fried calamari, seared scallops, and mussels that keep clientele coming back again and again. Luckily, the business has plenty of space to host the citizens of Harrisburg and surrounding areas. With 5,000 square feet and the capacity to host 100 customers indoors and additional covered booth seating available outside, there’s plenty of room for everyone. This restaurant also boasts an exclusive liquor license valued at $500K as Cumberland County has limited business allowance. Established staff, high profile and varied menu, and a closed market liquor license are just a few of the factors that set this business apart from competition.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still readily available and utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, but this is a preference and could be easily phased out as they have two full time managers. With an established website but minimal online marketing, a significant and cost-efficient growth opportunity exists for new ownership.

     

    Priced at $2,590,000, the restaurant is primed to continue its current growth pattern far beyond 2020 with 2021 annualized gross sales over $5M! A 15% down payment of $388,500 returns $457,123 in the first year after debt payments – a 118% return on investment!

     

     

    PRICE $2,590,000 CASH FLOW $785,573

  • Tennessee Based Meal Prep and Catering Service

    This business comes with a diverse menu, established client pipeline and staff, and continual year over year growth in gross revenue. Based in Tennessee, this meal prep and catering service offers preassembled healthy, delicious, and allergy aware meals to be delivered. With an excellent website to order off of, clients can place an order any day of the week before Friday at noon to be delivered the following Sunday or Monday. Orders can be for individuals, families, and catering from events to an office lunch. Current staff includes 25 total workers consisting of a combination of prep cooks, line cooks, managers, and delivery drivers. They outsource roughly 90% of deliveries in addition to their on-staff drivers. With a menu consisting of niche availabilities including gluten free, dairy free, keto, and whole360 options, it’s no wonder that their service area stretches to reach a 50-mile radius around Nashville. A rotating menu consisting of fan favorites including chicken, steak, vegetarian, pasta, and burrito meals keeps both individual and catering customers coming back for more!

     

    Unlike most food, service, or catering businesses, this business not only survived but thrived during the Covid19 pandemic. Thanks to their preestablished reputation and ability to deliver prepackaged, healthy, and delicious meals, their service boomed in covid. Changing from buffet style catering and continuing to offer home delivered meals, both sides of this business continually grew both in 2020 and 2021. Thanks to returning customers and referrals, we have reason to believe that 2022 will see continued growth based on the first quarter income. Only one of the current owners is active in the day to day of the business as there are currently 4 managers in place and they have offered 2 months of training to ensure a smooth transition. Growth opportunities for new ownership include a shift in catering focus to include more event-based work rather than just office orders, increasing available delivery days, and expanding on current high-profile clientele into brand partnerships.

     

    Priced at $1,600,000 this business is ready for a new owner to step in and capitalize on existing assets!

    PRICE $1,600,000 CASH FLOW $411,334

  • Premium Playground Distributor Profiting Over $500K

    This premium playground company handles the sales, delivery, and installation of recreation equipment consisting of residential playground equipment (65% of revenue), commercial playground equipment (5% of revenue), trampolines (12% of revenue), and basketball equipment (12% of revenue). They also host on-site birthday parties and free-play time which allows for a significant amount of crossadvertising and makes up 6% of their revenue. This is held in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility which consists of 5,000 sq. ft of offices and party rooms, 10,000 sq. ft show of floor/ play space, and 5,000 sq. ft warehouse and equipment storage There are no comparable competitors in this business’s area and they are able to control the quality and timeliness of every instillation through their well-trained and experienced team. Their staff consists of 3 in store sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, 2 installers, 2 seasonal installers, and 2 subcontractors.

     

    Established in 1993, the reputation of this business is incredibly well known in the Omaha area and is overall positive, as a large portion of their customer base has approached them due to word of mouth. The current owner purchased this business in 2009 and since then has worked full-time with responsibilities consisting of payroll, marketing, accounting, general oversite, scheduling, and logistics. The current owner is looking to sell in order to spend more time with his family, and has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $1,750,000, a new owner would see a 132% return on investment in the first year of purchase! With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business, this business is primed for new ownership to step in and build the upon the growth pattern seen in recent years while benefiting from the day-to-day activities of bringing joy to children that current ownership revels in.

    PRICE $1,750,000 CASH FLOW $959,777

  • Combined Listing – Firearm Sales & Services + Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue

     

    Something you don’t see every day – one owner selling two businesses!  For the price of $5.19M, you would be getting both a Firearm Sales & Services AND Posh Restaurant with $5M in Revenue!  By purchasing the two together, a buyer would be saving $200K Both businesses are located in the same strip center in Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, bringing in regular foot traffic and destination shoppers alike.

     

    At the firearms store, there are 5 FT employees and 1 PT.  The owner’s son is the managing member, and he is willing to stay on full time for the next owner.  That salary is accounted for in our cash flow.  The restaurant has 50 employees on staff, including a full management team for front of house and back of house.  The owner is willing to train and transition for 3-6 months at both businesses, as needed for the buyer.

     

    The COVID-19 pandemic forced the restaurant to close from mid-March to mid-April 2020, but they quickly bounced back with the introduction of curbside pickup (that is still presently utilized) and were back to full capacity by the middle of summer. The current owner provides general oversight for the day-to-day operations, filling roles and positions as needed during peak hours. With minimal online marketing, a significant growth opportunity exists for a new owner, with a current owner training period dependent on the experience and needs of the buyer.

     

    Customers of all types frequent the store – avid gun collectors, hunters, recreational shooters, people looking for a home protection firearm, local law enforcement agencies, first responders, and military personnel can find something to fit their needs. The revenue is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms vs. accessories. They also do firearm trade-ins, basic gunsmithing, scope installation, night sight installation, and total tear-down, cleaning, reassembly, and function checks. They sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers.

     

    This combined listing is a unique opportunity to get into two very different industries at the same time!

    PRICE $5,190,000 CASH FLOW $1,373,804

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

  • 105-Person Capacity Bar with Kitchen

    In business for 14 years, this business has $180,000 in buildout with a capacity of 105 people! They added a cozy fenced in patio with wind protection for smokers. Equipment totals $60,000 and includes a walk-in freezer/fridge, a kitchen hood, dishwasher, and miscellaneous furniture, fixtures, and equipment. There are two full time bartenders/ servers and five part-time servers/bartenders that take care of the customers. The lease is $4,635 per month for 2,500 square feet and a new owner would only have to put forth a down payment of $40,000.

    Selling the business as a part of a planned retirement strategy, the current owner is responsible for cleaning, inventory management, vendor relations, bookkeeping, bank deposits and payroll. There are growth opportunities in advertising on social media, establishing B2B relationships with nearby businesses and other forms of low cost or free advertising.

    With continual development in the area, this bar and grill is in the prime location for success! When it comes to the developing areas in Omaha, this is one to watch.  The neighboring $200MM project will bring apartment complexes, 300,000 sq. ft. of office space and neighborhood retail and an amphitheater near this retail hot spot. Sporting a unique theme that lures in a mix of consistent locals and fresh out of town visitors, the bar hosts competitive dart leagues throughout the week, Keno and karaoke on the weekends to keep the place busy.


    PRICE $115,000

  • Award-Wiinning Eatery near Omaha

    This eatery very close to Omaha does not only have great-tasting food, but also happens to be in a location full of growth potential!! A new big-box department store has just been approved nearby along with a new street sign, leading to more traffic and MORE customers! This eatery has won “Best Of” in their current location. It has also already grown 24.1% since last year 

    PRICE $137,000 CASH FLOW $90,403

Selfcare/Childcare (8)

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Health & Wellness Company Serving Employees

     

    This health and wellness company serves employers across various industries, and boasts strong client loyalty – with a 100% renewal rate in 2020! The company provides health and wellness programs which includes numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company also has extremely low overhead due to not requiring a commercial office space. The intangible asset of its long-term relationships with clients can’t be understated, providing a stable base for future growth.
     
    The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.
     
    Most clients have a one-year contract, and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.
     
    Priced at $490,000, a 10% down payment of $49,000 returns $118,046 in the first year after debt payments – a 241% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!
     

     

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $192,443

  • Endodontics Office with 2.5 DDS

    This endodontics office has been in business for more than 50 years! With 2.5 DDS working out of 4 operatories, they are bale to serve the entire Philadelphia area, this practice has a full staff on board who do both pre and post-procedure root canal work.  This business boasts a large and growing revenue stream and has the track record to demonstrate stability as well! The 4 operatories serve clients of all ages in Philadelphia and a 20-mile radius and have the ability to expand into the suburbs as well. This practice does both surgical and non-surgical procedures. Many of these procedures utilize newly developed technologies, while a unique procedure that was co-developed by an associate sees patients coming in from Europe to see them! The patient demographic range is significant, and the practice serves all ages. In striving for the best in quality patient care, this practice has set itself up as the biggest in the area.

     

    Under its current ownership since 2015, this practice has a 2,945 sq. ft. office space. Assets included in the space are 4 operatories along with microscopes and CPCT 3-D imaging machines. The current owner has a desire to step away from the business aspects of the practice in order to exclusively focus on their passion of patient care. They welcome all prospective buyers regardless of background and would stay on as long as needed to ensure that a smooth transition takes place.

     

    Priced at $905,000, this practice has a great deal of growth opportunities, including an expansion of operations out into the Philadelphia suburbs as well as an increase of online presence and general marketing! Just a 10% down payment of $90,500 returns $112,420 in the first year after debt payments—a 124% return on investment!

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $229,121

  • Home Health Franchise in Nebraska

    This home health care agency services 5 counties around the Omaha and surrounding counties in a field that will never be deemed unnecessary, healthcare. This home health company based in Nebraska had a 46% profit margin in 2021 and has 43 caregivers on staff!

     

    This company is a franchise that has been operating for 30 years, but this specific location has been under its current ownership since 2018.  This business has gained a great reputation due to the company’s excellent service!

     

    The current owner has offered 3-6 months of training and their responsibilities include general oversight and hiring new staff. The company itself offers the stability of a franchise office and this location is the most successful one.  Services offered by the 43 caregivers on staff include 24-hour care, care coordination, and long as well as short-term care.

     

    The agency serves 5 total counties surrounding the Omaha Metropolitan area. These counties include Douglas, Sarpy, Cass, and Saunders. As well as Pottawatomi County in Iowa.

     

    Growth opportunities include developing an established marketing plan, partnering with insurance companies to expand services, hiring a sales representative to further expand the client flow, and advancing current marketing tactics. 

     

    This agency goes the extra mile to ensure that their clients are receiving the best services in the comfort of their own home. They personally pair caregivers with clients based on personality and skillset and this attention to detail has afforded them an excellent reputation for care.

     

    Priced at $790,000, a 10% down payment of $79,000 returns $111,600 on the first year! This reputable company continues to grow due to their willingness to go the extra mile for their clients and consistent referrals.

     

     

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $228,938

  • Premier Full-Service Omaha Dental Laboratory

    Located in Omaha, Nebraska and with 7 FT employees in place, this premier full service dental laboratory is able to handle nearly every aspect of the job. This well-established business has been in operation since 1999 and enjoys a high reputation with clients. Experiencing constant revenue growth while simultaneously enjoying a 20% profit margin, this business is a stable investment into the dental industry, an essential economic need. Over $250k in assets are included in the sale, including 3D printers, scanners, steamers, and mixers. The lab operates out of two side by side offices and offers full service creating top-quality custom restorations for dental and oral surgery offices. With years of expertise in the industry, the business provides a seamless approach from design through completion.

     

    They offer many services such as implant restorations, veneers, 3D printing, crowns, bridges, and many more. This is a full-service lab that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well. 

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, the majority of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done.  The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources to do so now. There are seven total employees staffed at this laboratory, including six technicians specializing in different areas of dental artistry and one driver who delivers dental restorations to offices in a time-sensitive matter.

     

    At a purchase price of $830,000, a buyer can expect a $111,140 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team results in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $830,000 CASH FLOW $269,019

  • Profitable Iowa Day Spa with well-established client base

     

    This Central Iowa based day spa offers a wide range of services such as massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, men’s treatments, waxing, lash application and more. This is a great opportunity for someone looking to either get into the day spa business, or those interested in owing a profitable and self-sufficient business in Iowa. With 25 staff members, including a manager, assistant manager and 2 team leads, this creates the perfect opportunity to continue with passive ownership. This day spa boasts over 800 active memberships spanning their 3 types of memberships, though services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. As with most spas and similar operations they were mandated to close their doors for 2 months in 2020, yet still saw an increase in revenues and profit that year. Following reopening there has been an increase in cash flows between 2020 and 2021 totaling over $100,000. With over $1.4 million in revenue in 2021 this business is on a path to even higher growth with the right ownership and planning!

     

     

    This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the 2022 year.  Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. Based on the revenue for 2021 that would add up a total of $1,498,503 in revenue and based on the current profit margin of 18% that bumps the cash flow up to $269,730 only including current expected price changes, not including any new customers in the coming years. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and doing their best to provide a real resort feel just right around the corner.

     

    The attractive price of $790,000 allows a buyer to see a return of $140,767 in the first year after debt payments!  This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $256,295

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Nurse Staffing Agency in Texas with 32% Profit Margin

    Due to the supply and demand of nurses, this staffing agency has a steady flow of clients each week and has seen year-over-year growth in sales and consistently high profit margins! Established in West Central Texas for over 20 years, the company provides Registered Nurses, Licensed Vocational Nurses, Certified Nursing Assistants, and Certified Medication Aids for hospitals, clinics, nursing homes, government, state, and schools on an as-needed, short-term, or long-term basis. Partnering with some of the leading healthcare facilities in the state of Texas, each nurse recruited by the agency is sent to the client as a W2 employee, which sets them apart from other staffing agencies. They average 65-75 active employees (RN’s, LVN’s, CNA’s, and CMA’s) who are in the system and ready to work when needed. As facilities are constantly faced with last minute and temporary staffing needs due to vacations, staffing shortages, and open shifts as a result of scheduled and unscheduled absences, this agency has a steady flow of clients each week.

     

    Office staff includes 1 Office Manager/HR and 1 Staff Coordinator, and all nurses in their database are employed by the agency. All applicants are thoroughly screened before being submitted to a facility’s HR department. Base hourly rates for the nurses range from $18-$25/hour for CNA’s, $30-$37/hour for LVN’s, and $40-$47/hour for RN’s, with rates going higher if the nurse is working in a specialty unit or Covid unit. The number of clients/positions filled varies by the week, depending on demand; in general, the agency distributes 35-45 paychecks each week to the nurses.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this agency already has a solid reputation and a well-established client base. A new owner could easily boost revenue by implementing a marketing strategy, creating a social media presence, and updating the company website. This would be a great opportunity and highly beneficial for an existing staffing agency to purchase.

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,911,740

Rentals/Transportation/Automotive (8)

  • Specialty Equipment Fleet: Rental and Maintenance with Two Locations

    This specialty equipment business currently has $4M in backlog; applying the average 19% profit margin, this business could see profits over $3M in 2022! Their services are rental, sales, repair, and maintenance of niche equipment, including foundation & directional drilling equipment, cranes, and rotators. With a primary location in Phoenix, Arizona and a second location in Salt Lake City, Utah, they are able to service the Southwestern sector of the United States. Their clients consist of general & specialized contractors, foundation companies, electrical companies, waste management, infrastructure firms, and private owners of large equipment. Included with the purchase of this business is over $7.9M in equipment and inventory, making the business 68% collateralized. The team includes a CFO, Project and Operating Consultant, Mechanic, 2 Sales Representatives, 1 Accountant, and 1 Yard Manager.  The owner oversees sales for only 15-20 hours a week, which the COO is being mentored to absorb.

     

    Established over 15 years ago, this well-known business offers a solid reputation with only two competitors. Other growth opportunities include increasing rental inventory and expanding their reach into Texas. They have a client base made up of 75% repeat customers: This is primarily due to clients renting equipment, and then realizing they need to continue renting the unit for increased job performance or purchase it outright.

     

    Priced at $11,600,000 this business has the potential to return $1,111,409 in 2022 based on the 2020+2022 average cash flow. The current owner believes in the businesses onward & upward revenues and is willing to roll equity of 10%, plus offer a 15% promissory note. This shows good faith in the future success of the business and mitigates risk to the future owner!

    PRICE $11,600,000 CASH FLOW $2,700,000

  • Towing & Recovery, Auto Repairs in Northern Ontario

    Generating over $2M in annual revenue, with $1M virtually guaranteed from roadside services, this Ontario-based business has been established for over 20 years! Providing towing and recovery services for roadside companies, law enforcement agencies, municipal fleets, public vehicles, emergency vehicles, and local individuals, they also provide expert automotive repairs including brakes, steering, engine diagnostics, and heavy truck repairs. 72% of revenue is from towing services and 28% is from auto repair services.  The 18-person team includes 8 full-time drivers, 3 mechanics, 3 apprentices, an office manager, a dispatcher, a part-time bookkeeper, and a payroll clerk with most employees having 6+ years tenure. The current owner commissions for towing jobs and handles high-level management functions, he is not doing any of the labor or driving. The business is well positioned to dominate the market with opportunities to expand the towing business and expand geographically into the Soo area.

     

    There is over $500K worth of equipment with $192K capex that would be included in the sale. The roadside and auto repair divisions have created niche segments that help protect the work and a large moat has been created by tying up the larger roadside contracts within the district. This makes it hard for other companies to get a foot hold.

     

    In addition, the garage has the only heavy mechanic shop within 55 km and they have multiple light and heavy licenses. Most of their revenue comes from long-term contracts with roadside service companies and referrals from local law enforcement agencies.  The largest towing customer operates on negotiated three-year contracts and they have been a loyal customer for over 21 years. Their website and word-of-mouth advertising from loyal and long-standing clientele help them obtain new clients on a regular basis.

    PRICE $2,625,000 CASH FLOW $742,319

  • Rental Business with 36% Profit Margin

     

    This rental company boasts a profit margin of 36% and nearly $15M in assets! Services include hauling, installation, dismantlement, rental, and sale of frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms. On average, 60% of revenue comes from rentals. They are highly diversified, with 15 customers making up 70% of their revenue and 95% of their clients recurring, with 95% continually recurring; including general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair & installation contractors, there is no shortage of projects! The company is currently operating at a 36% profit margin, which is very strong. They are able to offer a wide range of services thanks to the 60+ skilled employees on staff, including 7 office staff, 3 mechanics, 3 field managers, 4 drivers, and 25-40 laborers.

     

    Boasting $4M in hydro mobile inventory (95+ units), they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 3-5 units. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market. In addition, the recently passed US Infrastructure Bill directly caters to this company’s core customer base and will certainly increase their revenue in the coming years.  The current workload consists of 45% restoration and 55% new construction. This company does little to no marketing or advertising due to their recurring clients or person.  A new owner could absolutely grow by simply adding a marketing and sales plan.

     

    Priced at $18,750,000, this business is 80% collateralized with the assets included in the sale!  It is positioned to grow in the contracting space by accepting more invitations, moving into neighboring cities, and expanding types of fleet, such as forklifts & drilling bores.  

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $5,304,421

  • Climate Controlled Food Logistics

    Since 1989, this business has provided high-quality climate-controlled logistics solutions. Along with their excellent and long-standing reputation, the purchase of this business comes with over $1.2M in assets. This skilled team consists of 28 total employees including 3 team leads, 13 long haul drivers, 4 local drivers, 6 warehouse workers, and 2 dispatchers which allows them to self-perform all driving, they do not use any outside contractors. These transportation services are focused in climate-controlled food deliveries with shipments ranging from 100-20,000lbs, they also offer warehousing, but distribution makes up 90% of their annual revenue. The business has a 20,000 square feet location in Milwaukee WI, 18,800 of which is warehouse space and 1,200 is office space. Their client base is primarily food production companies that need product distributed to stores. 85% of their customers are repeat business.

     

    Both of the current owners are active in the business and a replacement or retainment salary has been accounted for in our cash flow analysis and financial information. One owner handles financials, sales, and pricing and the other handles overseeing the leasing, purchasing, and maintenance of equipment. One person could do both roles with the addition of an outside book keeper, however, to ensure a smooth transition, the seller has agreed to stay up to 3 years. Growth opportunities that new owners could pursue moving forward include building on current partnerships: increasing the amount of storage being utilized by these clients or transitioning clients from one side of business to taking advantage of both the warehousing and transportation services offered.

     

    Priced at $2,525,000 a down payment of $315,625 returns $334,858 in the first year after debt payments. The owners have offered 12.5% seller financing with purchase, we believe this shows good faith in the future of the business. This business is ready for new ownership to take over and continue the pattern of growth that has been enjoyed in recent years. 

    PRICE $2,525,000 CASH FLOW $704,107

  • Passive Railroad Terminal Company

     

    This railroad terminal operation is entirely passive, with a 36 employee team of highly competent and cross-trained individuals maintaining daily operations. Included in the deal is $2.9M in assets! This company also boats an impressive set of growth opportunities. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services all offer clear routes to further growth for an already strong operation.

     

    Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

     

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers.

     

    The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

     

     

    PRICE $6,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,465,708

  • Trailer Manufacturing, Painting, & Maintenance

     

    The bank loan would be 100% collateralized from the included business assets with the purchase of this trailer manufacturing, painting & maintenance company. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. The average sale size is $52,500 per trailer; trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Priced at $435,000, opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request.

    PRICE $435,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Concrete Pumping for Schools & Hospitals – 90% Recurring Clients

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    With over $10M in hard assets, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, a 90% recurring client base, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

     

    PRICE $17,250,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

Selfcare/Childcare (8)

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Health & Wellness Company Serving Employees

     

    This health and wellness company serves employers across various industries, and boasts strong client loyalty – with a 100% renewal rate in 2020! The company provides health and wellness programs which includes numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company also has extremely low overhead due to not requiring a commercial office space. The intangible asset of its long-term relationships with clients can’t be understated, providing a stable base for future growth.
     
    The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.
     
    Most clients have a one-year contract, and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.
     
    Priced at $490,000, a 10% down payment of $49,000 returns $118,046 in the first year after debt payments – a 241% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!
     

     

     

    PRICE $490,000 CASH FLOW $192,443

  • Endodontics Office with 2.5 DDS

    This endodontics office has been in business for more than 50 years! With 2.5 DDS working out of 4 operatories, they are bale to serve the entire Philadelphia area, this practice has a full staff on board who do both pre and post-procedure root canal work.  This business boasts a large and growing revenue stream and has the track record to demonstrate stability as well! The 4 operatories serve clients of all ages in Philadelphia and a 20-mile radius and have the ability to expand into the suburbs as well. This practice does both surgical and non-surgical procedures. Many of these procedures utilize newly developed technologies, while a unique procedure that was co-developed by an associate sees patients coming in from Europe to see them! The patient demographic range is significant, and the practice serves all ages. In striving for the best in quality patient care, this practice has set itself up as the biggest in the area.

     

    Under its current ownership since 2015, this practice has a 2,945 sq. ft. office space. Assets included in the space are 4 operatories along with microscopes and CPCT 3-D imaging machines. The current owner has a desire to step away from the business aspects of the practice in order to exclusively focus on their passion of patient care. They welcome all prospective buyers regardless of background and would stay on as long as needed to ensure that a smooth transition takes place.

     

    Priced at $905,000, this practice has a great deal of growth opportunities, including an expansion of operations out into the Philadelphia suburbs as well as an increase of online presence and general marketing! Just a 10% down payment of $90,500 returns $112,420 in the first year after debt payments—a 124% return on investment!

    PRICE $905,000 CASH FLOW $229,121

  • Home Health Franchise in Nebraska

    This home health care agency services 5 counties around the Omaha and surrounding counties in a field that will never be deemed unnecessary, healthcare. This home health company based in Nebraska had a 46% profit margin in 2021 and has 43 caregivers on staff!

     

    This company is a franchise that has been operating for 30 years, but this specific location has been under its current ownership since 2018.  This business has gained a great reputation due to the company’s excellent service!

     

    The current owner has offered 3-6 months of training and their responsibilities include general oversight and hiring new staff. The company itself offers the stability of a franchise office and this location is the most successful one.  Services offered by the 43 caregivers on staff include 24-hour care, care coordination, and long as well as short-term care.

     

    The agency serves 5 total counties surrounding the Omaha Metropolitan area. These counties include Douglas, Sarpy, Cass, and Saunders. As well as Pottawatomi County in Iowa.

     

    Growth opportunities include developing an established marketing plan, partnering with insurance companies to expand services, hiring a sales representative to further expand the client flow, and advancing current marketing tactics. 

     

    This agency goes the extra mile to ensure that their clients are receiving the best services in the comfort of their own home. They personally pair caregivers with clients based on personality and skillset and this attention to detail has afforded them an excellent reputation for care.

     

    Priced at $790,000, a 10% down payment of $79,000 returns $111,600 on the first year! This reputable company continues to grow due to their willingness to go the extra mile for their clients and consistent referrals.

     

     

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $228,938

  • Premier Full-Service Omaha Dental Laboratory

    Located in Omaha, Nebraska and with 7 FT employees in place, this premier full service dental laboratory is able to handle nearly every aspect of the job. This well-established business has been in operation since 1999 and enjoys a high reputation with clients. Experiencing constant revenue growth while simultaneously enjoying a 20% profit margin, this business is a stable investment into the dental industry, an essential economic need. Over $250k in assets are included in the sale, including 3D printers, scanners, steamers, and mixers. The lab operates out of two side by side offices and offers full service creating top-quality custom restorations for dental and oral surgery offices. With years of expertise in the industry, the business provides a seamless approach from design through completion.

     

    They offer many services such as implant restorations, veneers, 3D printing, crowns, bridges, and many more. This is a full-service lab that clients depend on and integrate into their practices. The dental studio helps doctors and dentists increase patient retention and referrals by reducing chair time and increasing satisfaction. This implements success for not only the client, but for the company as well. 

     

    Due to the first-rate custom products this studio provides, the majority of their clients are recurring and long-lasting! There is an Instagram page, but no true marketing has ever been done.  The studio owner prefers to keep business local, but in the past has had clients in states across the U.S. and has the resources to do so now. There are seven total employees staffed at this laboratory, including six technicians specializing in different areas of dental artistry and one driver who delivers dental restorations to offices in a time-sensitive matter.

     

    At a purchase price of $830,000, a buyer can expect a $111,140 return in the first year after debt payments! This laboratory has plenty of growth opportunities, including offering services to doctors and dentists nationally and an increase in general marketing and advertisements. A great reputation and a highly experienced team results in this business being perfect for transitioning a new owner to continue the reputable dental laboratory.

    PRICE $830,000 CASH FLOW $269,019

  • Profitable Iowa Day Spa with well-established client base

     

    This Central Iowa based day spa offers a wide range of services such as massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, men’s treatments, waxing, lash application and more. This is a great opportunity for someone looking to either get into the day spa business, or those interested in owing a profitable and self-sufficient business in Iowa. With 25 staff members, including a manager, assistant manager and 2 team leads, this creates the perfect opportunity to continue with passive ownership. This day spa boasts over 800 active memberships spanning their 3 types of memberships, though services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. As with most spas and similar operations they were mandated to close their doors for 2 months in 2020, yet still saw an increase in revenues and profit that year. Following reopening there has been an increase in cash flows between 2020 and 2021 totaling over $100,000. With over $1.4 million in revenue in 2021 this business is on a path to even higher growth with the right ownership and planning!

     

     

    This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the 2022 year.  Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. Based on the revenue for 2021 that would add up a total of $1,498,503 in revenue and based on the current profit margin of 18% that bumps the cash flow up to $269,730 only including current expected price changes, not including any new customers in the coming years. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and doing their best to provide a real resort feel just right around the corner.

     

    The attractive price of $790,000 allows a buyer to see a return of $140,767 in the first year after debt payments!  This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $256,295

  • Hair School Financial Literacy Educational Program

    This extremely efficient business focuses on financial literacy educational programs for hair school students. The operation requires only the owner, resulting in an extremely high 77% average profit margin over the past three years, and devotes less than 10 hours per week. The business offers a curriculum package to hair schools which is an admission tool to get more enrollments and increase graduation rates by teaching financial literacy. The curriculum consists of textbooks authored by the owner, updated every 2-3 years, and a huge collection of videos teaching financial topics. The business is currently partnered with around 35 schools, so there is ample opportunity for growth. This program is the secret weapon to reduce drops, boost enrollments, improve attendance, and lower default rates.

     

    This business was created specifically for the beauty and cosmetology industry and uses an illustrated course book, animated videos, and turn-key lesson plans to teach financial lessons to benefit students in the future. This program will allow you to finally differentiate yourself from other schools and - at the same time - lower the number of drops in your school. The program has nothing to do with changing the curriculum, hiring new staff, or lowering tuition. First and foremost, this business is an admissions tool to get more enrollments.

     

    Priced at $990,000, this company will result in a 204% return on the investment in the first year. This program gives you a way to differentiate yourself from other schools in your area and be able to justify a higher price in order to stop students from “price shopping” schools.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $352,441

  • Nurse Staffing Agency in Texas with 32% Profit Margin

    Due to the supply and demand of nurses, this staffing agency has a steady flow of clients each week and has seen year-over-year growth in sales and consistently high profit margins! Established in West Central Texas for over 20 years, the company provides Registered Nurses, Licensed Vocational Nurses, Certified Nursing Assistants, and Certified Medication Aids for hospitals, clinics, nursing homes, government, state, and schools on an as-needed, short-term, or long-term basis. Partnering with some of the leading healthcare facilities in the state of Texas, each nurse recruited by the agency is sent to the client as a W2 employee, which sets them apart from other staffing agencies. They average 65-75 active employees (RN’s, LVN’s, CNA’s, and CMA’s) who are in the system and ready to work when needed. As facilities are constantly faced with last minute and temporary staffing needs due to vacations, staffing shortages, and open shifts as a result of scheduled and unscheduled absences, this agency has a steady flow of clients each week.

     

    Office staff includes 1 Office Manager/HR and 1 Staff Coordinator, and all nurses in their database are employed by the agency. All applicants are thoroughly screened before being submitted to a facility’s HR department. Base hourly rates for the nurses range from $18-$25/hour for CNA’s, $30-$37/hour for LVN’s, and $40-$47/hour for RN’s, with rates going higher if the nurse is working in a specialty unit or Covid unit. The number of clients/positions filled varies by the week, depending on demand; in general, the agency distributes 35-45 paychecks each week to the nurses.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this agency already has a solid reputation and a well-established client base. A new owner could easily boost revenue by implementing a marketing strategy, creating a social media presence, and updating the company website. This would be a great opportunity and highly beneficial for an existing staffing agency to purchase.

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,911,740

  • Niche Marketing Firm Specializing in Fulfillment

    This marketing and printing firm has over 300 current clients and $600,000 worth of current and upcoming projects. This mid-sized establishment has been serving the Omaha metropolitan area for over 30 years and is still receiving awards and accolades for its customer service and work quality. With a staff including 15 FT, 3PT, and 1 1099, this business has the capability to handle a variety of services while remaining flexible, quick, and reliable on jobs that bigger corporations would not be able to accept. The firm provides a wide array of services including marketing, printing, fulfillment, and is the only lettershop provider in the area. They have been able to grow to over 300 clients with only one sales representative.

     

    In addition to current services provided, the firm has room to grow outside of traditional printing jobs by utilizing staff’s current ability to handle layout, online marketing, and shipping services to expand in different printing directions. While this would not be a fully hands off ownership at the moment, the current owner is willing to assist with a smooth transition by offering at least one year of training which could be used to assist in hiring and training an in store general manager.

     

    Key growth opportunities include:

    • Expanding the focus of services to include more nontraditional work including hybrid marketing and book printing and/or distributing
    • Hiring additional personnel for the lettershop
    • Hiring additional sales representatives.
    • Investing in proper marketing campaigns/tactics

     

    At a purchase price of $1,250,000, and a down payment of $187,500, a buyer would see a return of $155,728 in the first year after debt payments!  This business is well set for a new owner to step in and continue the incredible legacy they have built over the years. 

    PRICE $1,250,000 CASH FLOW $335,660

  • Profitable Iowa Day Spa with well-established client base

     

    This Central Iowa based day spa offers a wide range of services such as massage therapy, skin care, body wraps, men’s treatments, waxing, lash application and more. This is a great opportunity for someone looking to either get into the day spa business, or those interested in owing a profitable and self-sufficient business in Iowa. With 25 staff members, including a manager, assistant manager and 2 team leads, this creates the perfect opportunity to continue with passive ownership. This day spa boasts over 800 active memberships spanning their 3 types of memberships, though services are also offered to non-members without the membership deals and pricing. As with most spas and similar operations they were mandated to close their doors for 2 months in 2020, yet still saw an increase in revenues and profit that year. Following reopening there has been an increase in cash flows between 2020 and 2021 totaling over $100,000. With over $1.4 million in revenue in 2021 this business is on a path to even higher growth with the right ownership and planning!

     

     

    This day spa works with clients of all ages from the surrounding towns and counties. Pricing was raised at the end of 2021, though many members were grandfathered in for the 2022 year.  Starting in 2023, this will be an automatic additional $7K+ per month in revenue. Based on the revenue for 2021 that would add up a total of $1,498,503 in revenue and based on the current profit margin of 18% that bumps the cash flow up to $269,730 only including current expected price changes, not including any new customers in the coming years. They have an edge over the competition with their attention to detail, number of services provided, price point, and doing their best to provide a real resort feel just right around the corner.

     

    The attractive price of $790,000 allows a buyer to see a return of $140,767 in the first year after debt payments!  This location is seeing incredible year over year growth with no sign of slowing down.

    PRICE $790,000 CASH FLOW $256,295

  • Passive Commercial Surveillance Company

     

    This opportunity is perfect for someone looking for a passive business. The current owner of this well-established commercial surveillance company lives out of the country for 4-6 months each year and the new owner can expect to do the same after the training period. This company installs popular surveillance systems for businesses in the Northern California area. A new owner will benefit from multiple growth opportunities: this business has great potential to expand into the residential sector if desired or operate as-is and enjoy an excellent return on the low down payment of $27,500!

     

    They are increasing installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expanding to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.) and adding government and municipal contracts would be perfect opportunities for revenue growth.

     

    • They are well-known in Northern California
    • 80% of sales is in the San Francisco Bay area, 15% regionally, and 5% of their business is nationwide.
    • Highly experienced team with everyone on the team having a 4+ year tenure
    • Uses advanced tech like secure wireless camera networks, license plate capturing cameras and Point of Sale surveillance systems

    The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and lives out of the country 4 months out of the year. The team is standardizing their service contracts to include both remote support and hands-on support, with an obvious preference for services they can provide remotely. Their camera systems offer real-time surveillance and video monitoring to ensure real-time protection.

     

    PRICE $275,000 CASH FLOW $76,776

  • Large Client Base and Diversified Services at Central Iowa Irrigation Company

    This Iowa-based Irrigation Company boasts over 900 clients operating out of Des Moines. Services include irrigation systems installation and maintenance, backflow testing, and winterization. Five irrigation/service techs provide estimates and perform field work and installation. With a loyal client base, the next owner will benefit from a trusted reputation, an experienced team, simple growth opportunities through online marketing, and $254k in assets.

     

    Most residential installations take less than a day to complete, with commercial projects lasting around 2-7 days. As the techs are staff are greatly experienced (with two licensed for backflow testing), they can respond to 8-10 service calls per day, working in pairs. Ready and able to expand, many of the company’s clients have inquired about additional services that may be offered. These growth opportunities include a lawn care division, as well as providing landscaping services for their great number of clients.

     

    A website and Facebook are currently utilized, but as flow of business is generated through word-of-mouth, the strengthening of the online presence holds great potential (especially in conjunction with an expansion of services). Both owners provide general oversight for operations (splitting between office work and service/installation tasks). They are looking to pursue new non-competing ventures and are open to a sale of the client list to someone already in the industry.

     

    Priced at $438,000, a 10% down payment returns $77,997 in the first year after debt payments, making this an investment that you won’t want to miss out on!


    PRICE $489,000 CASH FLOW $139,952

  • Full-Service Firearms Retailer with $1.2M in Guaranteed Inventory

    This full-service firearms retailer guarantees $1.2M in inventory which collateralizes 42% of the bank loan! The well-established business has been in operation since 2014 and provides a seamless approach through the purchasing process. With years of expertise in the firearms industry, this company is boasting a 20% profit margin. An incredible asset of the business is the well-trained and experienced team whom all have a long tenure within the company. The general manager in place fully handles business operations allowing the business to be passively owned. This business controls the quality and timeliness of every purchase by offering a vast number of services including gun trading, gunsmithing and cleaning, scope installation, total tear down and reassembly, and function checks. In addition to these inventory availabilities, the store has a wide variety of available products to meet these demands including new and used firearms, ammunition, and firearm accessories.  Their diverse outreach of customers includes local law enforcement agencies, first responders, military personnel, hunters, recreational shooters, people wanting to protect their home. With the aforementioned inventory and services, an outstanding reputation built on customer services, and their established and knowledgeable staff this business is primed for a new owner to step in and enjoy the spoils of an annual cash flow over $1M.

     

    The revenue, both online and in store, is generally split evenly between the sale of firearms and accessories. With an established customer base they sell approximately 3,000 firearms per year, with 1,000 of those sold to repeat customers. They work out of a 3,000 sq. ft. space and the current rent is $2,600/month, with 4 years left on the lease. They have 700 firearms in stock, valued at $1.2M which offers a bank loan that would be 60% collateralized.

     

    Priced at $3,800,000, this business is in a prime geographic location, has a solid online sales representation, has a solid reputation and client base already in place, and is poised for continued growth. A new owner could offer more online products by working with more distributors; the company currently works with three distributors but has memberships with 12. Opening the store on Sundays would also lead to a boost in sales.

    PRICE $3,800,000 CASH FLOW $1,029,895

  • Dropship Supplier with Established Client Base

    With a well-established client base, this order fulfillment business can be run from anywhere in the United States! This business has over 75 repeat clients and relationships with over 20 vendors, this dropship company sold over $5M in 2021 and are on track to grow! In addition, they are in the goal to exceed $10M in sales this year with a 12% year over year growth in the slow season. They sell a wide variety of products, including office, janitorial, restaurant, and industrial supplies, as well as furniture and technology accessories. Being a dropship business, they carry little overhead and have an extremely efficient team of 5 contracted employees. They are currently fulfilling around 4,000 orders each month, with an increase in Q4 each year to accommodate holiday sales. If you’re looking to jump into the e-commerce space, you won’t want to miss this opportunity!

     

    They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices. 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.  75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts. Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.

     

    This company priced at $3,250,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,250,000 CASH FLOW $837,785

  • Professional & Clerical Staffing Agency

    This staffing agency specializes in fulfilling the needs of their extremely diverse nationwide client base in the professional and clerical fields. Servicing customers that range from small businesses to large corporations, they offer multiple routes of staffing solutions to fulfill any business’s needs. This includes full-service, temp-to-hire, and direct hire staffing and payrolling services. These services can be utilized for part-time, short-term, or long-term opportunities, and several placements have remained in their positions for 10-15 years after placement. Located in Rhode Island, the current staff operates out of a 1,100 square foot leased building with a reception area and private offices that are perfect for interviews and different skills or communication tests. The team consists of 2 FT employees, 1 staffing specialist, and 1 on-call staffing coordinator as well as 55-60 temp employees on assignment. The current owner has offered 1-2 years for a transition/training period to ensure as smooth a move as possible for staff, clients, and the new owner.

     

    Certified as a Rhode Island WBE/DBE, many national firms contact this company to partner with them; one such healthcare company was awarded a bid to set up a contact center in Rhode Island and develop the healthcare program for the state. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Having been established 18 years ago, this agency is well respected in their community and are currently receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis. With a turn around time of 2 weeks to 2 months depending on the needs of the client, this business is known for providing exceptional service and always being accessible to their clients.  

     

    Priced at $549,000, this business already has an established client pipeline in place with the majority of new business coming from word-of-mouth referrals. A simple opportunity for new ownership to grow the business, and their current pipeline, would be to establish an internet presence consisting of both a website and social media accounts.

    PRICE $549,000 CASH FLOW $100,530

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Kitchen & Bath Remodeling/Renovating – 27% Profit Margin

    The population is booming in this Western North Carolina region, keeping demand incredibly high for home remodeling & renovation projects! Boasting consistent profit margins over 20%, this company is projecting over $1.6M in sales in 2021. Using top-of-the-line Matterport 3D camera and software, which is extremely valuable in the restoration world, they are able to cut down on estimating time by 50%-60%. Established for 20 years, this business specializes in renovations, reconstruction, kitchen/bath remodels, and additions, with a client base consisting primarily of residential customers (90%).  The highly skilled team includes the owner, who handles sales, estimating, and client relations, as well as a Superintendent of Operations and Carpenter, with a loyal base of 18-20 go-to subcontractors. Based out of a leased 1,200 sq. ft. facility in Buncombe County, all business is done locally within a 1-hour radius of the warehouse. Assets include every piece of equipment necessary to take on a remodel project or custom home building, a fully-equipped box truck, Ford F-250, Ford F-550, and a 6x12 open trailer.

     

    They have a solid marketing strategy already in place, using an SEO campaign run by Wordjack Media through Facebook, Google Ads, and their own well-established website. The company prides itself on personal service, communication, attention to detail, and professionalism; their solid name and reputation leads to word-of-mouth referrals in the community.

     

    Construction workers have been deemed essential, and with the drop in interest rates for construction loans & home loans, this company has plenty of work on the horizon with no end in sight. Priced at $1,000,000, it would be an excellent roll-up opportunity for an existing restoration company because of the knowledge and skill already in place. The current owner will stay on for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition and to see all current projects in the pipeline completed. The largest growth opportunities are in branching out more into custom homes, spec homes, and insurance work. With the right capital behind the company, revenue could triple in the next 2 years. A 12.5% down payment of $125,000 returns $219,901 in the first year after debt payments – a 176% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,000,000 CASH FLOW $439,791

  • Full-Service Stone & Tile Restoration in Phoenix – 1,600+ Clients

    This stone & tile restoration company has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $620,000, a 10% down payment of $62,000 returns $106,494 in the first year after debt payments – a 172% return on investment!

    PRICE $620,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • 3,600 Sq. Ft. Pet Boarding & Training Facility

     

    With a 2,000 sq. ft. main building & 1,600 sq. ft. indoor training facility, this pet complex has a 30% profit margin and great potential for growth all within the fence line. The large facility has the capacity for 100 dogs for daycare. The dogs that stay in this facility can sleep, eat, and train all on the spacious property, playing and learning in the great outdoors. Daycare includes romps around the play field and sunbathing while training services feature obedience, scent work, puppy classes, as well as agility, rally, and more. Boarding is charged per night, while training is charged by the class. The owner currently oversees administrative tasks as well as acting as a lead trainer and will stay on board as a trainer if Buyer desires. 

     

    The complex features a 2,000 square foot main building that contains the office, grooming facility, and boarding areas. There is an additional 1,600 square foot indoor training facility for obedience classes.   The wide-open acres of the property allow the dogs to run, romp, and tussle in the sun and in the snow.  The space also allows for unique training opportunities such as agility and scent work.

     

    Priced at $449,000, a 10% down payment of $44,900 returns $86,965 in the first year after debt payments – a 194% return on investment! This business features an incredible location for the services that they offer.  Working to capitalize on the unique space as well as the incorporated training options could be an area of focus for growth.  Targeted advertising may get the company in front of new clients and engagement on social media may generate excitement.

     

    PRICE $449,000 CASH FLOW $148,927

  • U.S. & Vietnam Production & Manufacturing of Corporate & Collegiate Gear

    This contract manufacturing company has a full management staff in place, and their own brand is already established, solidifying themselves in the market!  Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production & manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already well-established, they are able to act as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. Their brand is their R&D tool for developing products for their customers; they develop and test at retail stores to assess demand and retail value, as corporate image demand follows retail demand.

     

    They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors. The company is also on the approved vendor list for one of the biggest medical supply firms in the U.S. that is the official supplier for 60% of all hospitals & clinics. This gives them incredible exposure to their customer base for work on out of contract products (uniforms and other wearables).

     

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average sale size is $3k-$4k, and the average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days. The current owner offers management support and is willing to stay on board for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $16,500,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $16,500,000 CASH FLOW $3,329,997

  • Audiology Clinic Serving a 100 Mile Radius

     

     

    This audiology clinic is based out of two locations in Nebraska one of which is located at an owned building in West Point. This business is built on strong relationships with over 200 clients, as well as existing contracts with nursing homes and veteran facilities. The clinic serves a huge 100 mile radius centered at West Point! At the purchase price of $407,000, a 10% down payment of $40,700 returns $81,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a nearly 200% return on investment!

     

    This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the current owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services.

     

    PRICE $407,000 CASH FLOW $133,690

  • Full-Service Stone & Tile Restoration in Phoenix – 1,600+ Clients

    This stone & tile restoration company has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $620,000, a 10% down payment of $62,000 returns $106,494 in the first year after debt payments – a 172% return on investment!

    PRICE $620,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

  • Bar and Grill

    This Omaha Metro Area’s Newest Bar and Grill has really brought a fun and upbeat spot for many to relax and dine in.  The owner had more than 20 years of industry experience owning and operating other bars in which this location was established in November of 2008. Individuals enjoy delicious American food favorites with cold beverages from the bar and grill. This facility features a casual dining atmosphere with great food and drink selections.  It has also been a great attraction for many to watch the fine world of sports. 

    PRICE $210,000 CASH FLOW $72,000

  • Speciality Flooring

    PRICE $0

  • Premium Playground Distributor Profiting Over $500K

    This premium playground company handles the sales, delivery, and installation of recreation equipment consisting of residential playground equipment (65% of revenue), commercial playground equipment (5% of revenue), trampolines (12% of revenue), and basketball equipment (12% of revenue). They also host on-site birthday parties and free-play time which allows for a significant amount of crossadvertising and makes up 6% of their revenue. This is held in their 20,000 sq. ft. facility which consists of 5,000 sq. ft of offices and party rooms, 10,000 sq. ft show of floor/ play space, and 5,000 sq. ft warehouse and equipment storage There are no comparable competitors in this business’s area and they are able to control the quality and timeliness of every instillation through their well-trained and experienced team. Their staff consists of 3 in store sales associates, 1 receptionist and greeter, 2 installers, 2 seasonal installers, and 2 subcontractors.

     

    Established in 1993, the reputation of this business is incredibly well known in the Omaha area and is overall positive, as a large portion of their customer base has approached them due to word of mouth. The current owner purchased this business in 2009 and since then has worked full-time with responsibilities consisting of payroll, marketing, accounting, general oversite, scheduling, and logistics. The current owner is looking to sell in order to spend more time with his family, and has offered a transition/ training period of up to one year to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $1,750,000, a new owner would see a 132% return on investment in the first year of purchase! With growth opportunities including partnering with small schools, public parks, and growing the commercial side of business, this business is primed for new ownership to step in and build the upon the growth pattern seen in recent years while benefiting from the day-to-day activities of bringing joy to children that current ownership revels in.

    PRICE $1,750,000 CASH FLOW $959,777

  • Floral Boutique with 22% Profit Margin in Omaha

    Established floral studio and store with over $500,000 in gross sales. Situated in a well-trafficked strip mall in Omaha, this anchor store has become a staple since its opening in 2003. Delivering within the Omaha metro, this store has a customer retention rate of 80%. Sales have been at a steady clip over the last few years, bolstered by daily orders and contracts. The current owner has recently been signed for a large event that is expected to invoice over $6,000, and any ownership transition should not interrupt this deal.

    All staff are well-trained and capable, working within set hours and with the understood need for some seasonal flexibility. Currently there are three full-timers and one part-timer employed in the studio, in addition to two alternating delivery drivers. Employees are encouraged to help in the creation of custom floral designs that are then featured for sale. The seller is also assisted by a part-time bookkeeper who logs invoices into ShopKeep Point of Sale software.

    The 2,000-square foot building is leased at $11.25 per square foot, which is half of what most stores pay in this particular development. Leasing is all inclusive, covering the shop’s common area as well. Included in the sale is a delivery vehicle with around 50,000 in mileage.

    With the right buyer, this already successful business could increase sales through improving web traffic and revamping marketing materials. Seller is willing to finance 20%, and with a down payment of $24,000, a new owner may expect to see a three-fold return and a profit of $95,749 the first year.

    PRICE $120,000 CASH FLOW $113,432

Franchise (3)

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • 100% Delivery & Take Out – Omaha Pizza Franchise Location

     

    This Omaha pizza franchise location is currently 100% delivery & take out and is still seeing an increase in revenue through COVID! This location for sale has been in business since 1980, and under current ownership since 2006. There are around 21 employees, with FT Shift Leaders, and PT Kitchen Staff, Front Counter, and Delivery Drivers. All employees start at $11/hr., with Shift Leader pay at $18-18.50/hr. 80% of all employees are trained to full completion through the corporate online training. As the restaurant is franchised, a 5% portion of the revenue is paid out to the corporation, in addition to a small fee of $61/month for a customer loyalty program, in which a customer can earn free items as they accumulate points through the restaurant’s app. Their POS, Speedline, is fully integrated through Tillster, so the push of one button sets delivery in motion. Approximately 77% of the revenue is from dinner orders (after 4:00).

     

    Post-COVID, the restaurant has transitioned to be fully delivery and take-out based, with sales vastly improving over 2019. Currently, the dining area is still closed, and thus would be a perfect growth opportunity for a new owner, as the present dining area furniture was reupholstered during the COVID shutdown. Other key assets include two Middleby Marshall ovens, a make table, 60 qt. Hobart mixer, cooler, a Somerset dough sheeter, and POS systems. A great deal of local marketing is already done, with an advertising co-op being headed by local owners, and advertising partnerships done with local schools. The current owner provides general management and oversight for the location, opening the restaurant on Mondays and overall working 25-30 hours per week.

     

    Priced at just $535,000, a 15% down payment of $80,250 returns $88,861 in the first year after debt payments – a 111% return on investment!  A new owner could certainly boost revenue by obtaining a liquor license and re-opening the dining room.

    PRICE $535,000 CASH FLOW $156,707

  • Award-Wiinning Eatery near Omaha

    This eatery very close to Omaha does not only have great-tasting food, but also happens to be in a location full of growth potential!! A new big-box department store has just been approved nearby along with a new street sign, leading to more traffic and MORE customers! This eatery has won “Best Of” in their current location. It has also already grown 24.1% since last year 

    PRICE $137,000 CASH FLOW $90,403

Thinking of Selling?
When selecting an M&A firm, please use the following Scorecard: click here for our M&A Scorecard

The Firm makes no warranties or representation in consideration to the information provided above. All communication regarding this business must occur directly with The Firm Advisors, LLC. The Firm is not a real estate brokerage and does not sell real estate. The Firm solely advises on exit strategy.